WO2021190069A1 - Roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, storage medium, and system - Google Patents

Roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, storage medium, and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021190069A1
WO2021190069A1 PCT/CN2020/142262 CN2020142262W WO2021190069A1 WO 2021190069 A1 WO2021190069 A1 WO 2021190069A1 CN 2020142262 W CN2020142262 W CN 2020142262W WO 2021190069 A1 WO2021190069 A1 WO 2021190069A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
access point
roaming
target terminal
point device
control device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/142262
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
魏启坤
包德伟
孙福清
白小飞
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to BR112022019389A priority Critical patent/BR112022019389A2/en
Priority to JP2022558280A priority patent/JP2023518526A/en
Priority to EP20927152.7A priority patent/EP4114090A4/en
Publication of WO2021190069A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021190069A1/en
Priority to US17/947,562 priority patent/US20230014083A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/16Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B17/00Monitoring; Testing
    • H04B17/30Monitoring; Testing of propagation channels
    • H04B17/309Measuring or estimating channel quality parameters
    • H04B17/318Received signal strength
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/20Selecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/08Access security
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • H04W36/00837Determination of triggering parameters for hand-off
    • H04W36/008375Determination of triggering parameters for hand-off based on historical data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/11Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/22Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium, and system.
  • Wireless local area network includes two architectures.
  • One architecture includes access controller (AC) and multiple access point devices (AP).
  • AC access controller
  • AP access point devices
  • the access point devices are used to provide services for the terminal.
  • one access point device corresponds to a basic service set (basic service set, BSS)
  • BSS basic service set
  • ESS extended service set
  • the process of the terminal switching between different BSSs in the ESS can be referred to as roaming.
  • how to conduct roaming guidance has become an urgent problem to be solved at present.
  • the related art proposes a roaming guidance method, which includes: the first access point device detects the signal strength when it communicates with a target terminal, the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device, and the first access point The device is one of the aforementioned multiple access point devices. If the signal strength is less than or equal to the strength threshold, a basic service transition management (BSS transition management, BTM) message is sent to the target terminal.
  • BSS transition management, BTM basic service transition management
  • the BTM message carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and the BTM message is used to Instruct the target terminal to roam to an access point device among one or more reference access point devices.
  • the one or more reference access point devices refer to the neighboring access point devices of the first access point device and the target terminal An access point device with strong signal strength during communication.
  • the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, that is, the target terminal itself stores a set of roaming rules to determine whether to accept the roaming guidance of the first access point device.
  • different types of terminals may comply with different roaming rules. Therefore, roaming guidance is performed according to the above method, resulting in a lower success rate of roaming guidance.
  • This application provides a roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium and system, which can improve the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • the technical solution is as follows:
  • a roaming guidance method in which the first access point device determines the signal when each second access point device of one or more second access point devices communicates with the target terminal Strength to obtain one or more signal strengths, one or more second access point devices include the first access point device and/or neighbor access point devices of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to the first access point device A terminal associated with the access point device.
  • the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, and the roaming guidance instruction carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and roaming guidance The instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model
  • the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming guidance condition and the built-in target terminal The roaming rules are not much different. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully.
  • the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device may obtain the reference roaming guidance condition from the access control device according to the model identifier of the target terminal in an active manner or a passive manner.
  • the first access point device receives and stores the first correspondence sent by the access control device, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device. In this way, when the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier, the first access point device can determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the access control device may actively send the first correspondence relationship to the first access point device.
  • the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, it can determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal. In this way, during the roaming guidance process, there is no need for the first access point device to interact with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions, but to directly follow the model identifier of the target terminal from the first correspondence stored locally Determining the reference roaming guide condition reduces the number of interactions between the first access point device and the access control device, thereby saving overhead.
  • the first access point device sends a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal. The relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device.
  • the access control device determines the first correspondence, it does not deliver the first correspondence to the first access point device. Instead, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends the first guidance condition acquisition request carrying the model identifier of the target terminal to the access control device, and then the access control The device determines the reference roaming guide condition from the first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and then sends it to the first access point device. In this way, after the reference roaming guidance condition is updated, it can be ensured that the first access point device can obtain the reference roaming guidance condition with higher accuracy in time.
  • the process for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal may include: the first access point device obtains the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  • the manner in which the first access point device obtains the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device may include two manners, namely the following manner (1) and manner (1).
  • the first access point device sends a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control (MAC) address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the access The model identifier of the target terminal sent by the control device.
  • MAC media access control
  • a second correspondence relationship is stored in the access control device in advance, and the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address identified by the access control device.
  • the access control device receives the model query request sent by the first access point device, it can determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal carried in the model query request, and then The model identifier of the target terminal is sent to the first access point device. In this way, there is no need for the access control device to issue the second correspondence to the first access point device in advance, and when the access control device updates the model identifier of the target terminal, it can also ensure that the first access point The equipment can obtain the more accurate model identification in time.
  • the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device, and the model identifier of the target terminal is after the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal , Determined by the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the access control device after the access control device receives the data message sent by the target terminal, it can directly obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message, and then obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the first data message according to the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal after the model identifier of the target terminal is determined, it is directly sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device can actively determine the model identifier of the target terminal and issue it to the first access point device, so that it is not necessary for the first access point device to guide the target terminal to the access control device when roaming.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal which can reduce the interaction between the first access point device and the access control device during roaming guidance of the target terminal, thereby improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
  • the access control device can determine the MAC address of the terminal according to the data message sent by the terminal, and then determine the model identifier of the terminal, thereby creating a second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the terminal and the model identifier.
  • the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  • the access control device can distinguish different models of terminals according to the different model description information. That is, taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may directly use the model description information of the target terminal as the model identifier of the target terminal. Of course, the access control device can also distinguish the model type of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and then assign a corresponding model identifier to the target terminal.
  • the first access point device can not only determine the reference roaming guidance condition through the model identifier of the target terminal according to the first and second methods mentioned above, but the first access point device can also use other methods. Ways to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the first access point device may determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the first access point device sends a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device receives the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
  • the reference roaming guide condition is the first corresponding relationship stored by the access control device after determining the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the first access point device does not need to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and can directly send the second guide condition acquisition request carrying the MAC address of the target terminal to the access control device.
  • the access control device After the access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request, it determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then according to the model identifier of the target terminal, from the first corresponding In the relationship, determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the first access point device interacts with the access control device once to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions without first interacting with the access control device to determine the reference model. Identification, and then use the model identification to perform a secondary interaction with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions. That is, the number of interactions with the access control device is reduced, thereby saving overhead.
  • the identification of one or more reference access point devices may also be determined.
  • the first access point device obtains a roaming device list from the access control device, and the roaming device list includes the identifiers of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are The neighbor access point device of the first access point device.
  • the first access point device determines the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
  • the first access point device can obtain the roaming device list from the access control device in an active or passive manner, that is, the first access point device can directly receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device; Alternatively, the first access point device may send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identity of the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • the access control device can actively send the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. In this way, when the first access point device subsequently guides the target terminal in roaming, the identification of one or more reference access point devices can be directly determined from the roaming guide list without interacting with the access control device, reducing ⁇ overhead.
  • the access control device can determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and then, the device identification of each access point device and the corresponding roaming device The list is stored in the correspondence between the device identification and the roaming device list.
  • the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device, it can compare the stored device identification with the identification of the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device.
  • the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is determined, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device may also determine the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to different access point devices, and the access control device may associate the device identification of each access point device with the corresponding one.
  • the identities of the multiple third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity. That is, the identifier of each access point device is used as the first device identifier, the identifier of the third access point device corresponding to each access point device is used as the second device identifier, and the device identifier of each access point device is combined with The identities of the corresponding one or more third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity.
  • the identity of the first access point device can be used as the first device identity, from In the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier, determine the corresponding one or more second device identifiers, and then use the determined one or more second device identifiers as one corresponding to the first access point device Or the identities of multiple third access point devices. Then, a roaming device list including the identities of the one or more third access point devices is generated, and the roaming device list is sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device After the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device, it does not generate a roaming device list and send it to the first access point device, but instead stores the device identity and the identity of the third access point device.
  • the corresponding relationship between the roaming device lists, or the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier is stored.
  • the access control device may determine the first A roaming device list corresponding to the access point device, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device, so that when the roaming guide list corresponding to the first access point device is updated It can ensure that the first access point device can obtain a list of roaming devices with higher accuracy.
  • the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices.
  • the first access point device selects the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device from the one or more third access point devices.
  • the one or more third access point devices may be selected from the roaming device list according to the roaming device list. Select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition among the three to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
  • a roaming guidance method in which an access control device determines a reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the access control device sends a reference roaming guide condition to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device refers to the access point device.
  • the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. In this way, during subsequent roaming guidance, even if the built-in roaming rules of different types of terminals are different, the target terminal meets the reference determined by the above method. After roaming guidance conditions, when roaming guidance is performed on the target terminal, the success rate of roaming guidance can be improved.
  • the access control device may send the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device in multiple ways. Several of these methods are introduced next.
  • the access control device sends a first correspondence to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the access control device receives the first guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the first guide condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device.
  • the first access point device needs to first determine the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal, and determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence is used to indicate access The model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the control device. After that, the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the manner in which the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal may include: the access control device receives a model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal; or, The access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the access control device receives the second boot condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the second boot condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence is used to indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address identified by the access control device .
  • the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device .
  • the access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device.
  • the access control device may also create a second correspondence before determining the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal. The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal. The access control device stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  • the access control device may also issue a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. That is, the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device. The access control device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device. The roaming device list includes the identities of one or more third access point devices, and one or more third access point devices. The access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device. The access control device sends a roaming device list to the first access point device.
  • the access control device may also determine one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device.
  • the ID of the in-point device That is, the access control device obtains multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the multiple historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality behind the device has improved.
  • the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • the access control device stores the identification of one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
  • the access control device may store the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list, and may also store the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. Therefore, the access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device. Or multiple third access point device identifiers to generate a roaming device list, that is, a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. After that, the access control device can combine the identifier of the first access point device with the first access point device. The roaming device list corresponding to the in-point device is stored in the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list.
  • the access control device may use the identity of the first access point device as the first device identity, use the identity of the third access point device corresponding to the first access point device as the second device identity, and use the first access point device as the second device identity.
  • the identification of the point device and the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device are stored in the correspondence between the first device identification and the second device identification.
  • the access control device may determine one or more first access point devices corresponding to the first access point device according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. 3.
  • the identification of the access point device That is, the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • the access control device obtains the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records.
  • the access control device determines the identification of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record and the acquired identification of the neighbor access point device as one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device The identification of the device.
  • reinforcement learning is a type of AI algorithm.
  • Reinforcement learning refers to a goal-oriented algorithm.
  • This learning algorithm can make the determined one or more third access point devices more accurate. That is, the one or more third access point devices determined by means of reinforcement learning are access point devices with improved signal quality after roaming from the first access point device.
  • multiple historical roaming records include access point devices that have been guided by roaming before, but the access point devices that have not been guided by roaming may also be access point devices with improved signal quality, so they can also be included in the The neighbor access point device of the multiple historical roaming records serves as the third access point device.
  • the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, including: the access control device determines a combination of multiple access point devices, and each Multiple parameter combinations corresponding to the access point device combination, each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device, and the source access point device in the multiple access point device combination All are the first access point devices.
  • the access control device uses different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance for one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The test is to successfully guide one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam as the standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the access control device determines the combination of multiple access point devices, it can not only perform roaming guidance tests according to different signal strengths, but also perform roaming guidance based on parameters such as channel, frequency band, and access point device load. test. That is, the access point device can perform multiple roaming guidance tests according to one or more of the characteristics of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load of the access point device to determine the reference roaming guidance condition.
  • the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
  • a roaming guidance device in a third aspect, is provided, and the roaming guidance device has the function of realizing the behavior of the roaming guidance method in the first aspect.
  • the roaming guide device includes one or a module, and the one or more modules are used to implement the roaming guide method provided in the first aspect.
  • the roaming guidance device includes: a first determining module and a first sending module.
  • the first determining module is used to determine the signal strength of each second access point device in the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal to obtain one or more signal strengths, and one or more second access point devices.
  • the access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device;
  • the first determining module is further configured to determine that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition according to one or more signal strengths
  • the first sending module is configured to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal when the first determining module determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the roaming guidance instruction carries one or more reference access point device identifiers, and the roaming guidance instruction It is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model,
  • the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal
  • the third determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
  • the device further includes:
  • the first receiving module is configured to receive and store the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device;
  • the third determining module is used to:
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the first corresponding relationship.
  • the third determining module includes:
  • the first sending submodule is configured to send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
  • the first receiving sub-module is configured to receive the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in the target terminal according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the one-to-one correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each type identifier recognized by the access control device.
  • the second determining module includes:
  • the obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  • the obtaining submodule includes:
  • the sending unit is configured to send a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device ;or
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal is the access control device after obtaining the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and then through the target terminal The MAC address is determined.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second sending module is configured to send a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
  • the reference roaming guide condition is that after the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal, the first corresponding stored in itself Determined in the relationship, the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the device further includes:
  • the obtaining module is used to obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list includes the identification of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are the first access point devices Neighbor access point equipment;
  • the fourth determining module is configured to determine the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
  • the acquisition module includes:
  • the second receiving submodule is used to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • the second sending submodule is configured to send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the third receiving submodule is configured to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices
  • the fourth determining module includes:
  • the selection submodule is used to select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
  • a roaming guidance device in a fourth aspect, is provided, and the roaming guidance device has the function of realizing the behavior of the roaming guidance method in the second aspect.
  • the roaming guidance device includes one or a module, and the one or more modules are used to implement the roaming guidance method provided in the above-mentioned second aspect.
  • the roaming guidance device includes: a first determining module and a first sending module.
  • the first determining module is configured to determine the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
  • the first sending module is configured to send reference roaming guidance conditions to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device is the finger connection An access point device controlled by the access control device.
  • the first sending module is used to:
  • the first correspondence is sent to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the device further includes:
  • a first receiving module configured to receive a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by a first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries a model identifier of the target terminal;
  • the second determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device Guidance conditions.
  • the device further includes:
  • the first obtaining module is used to obtain the media access control MAC address of the target terminal
  • the third determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device.
  • the second sending module is configured to send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first obtaining module includes:
  • the receiving sub-module is configured to receive the model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the fourth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device.
  • Model ID According to the model ID of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the stored first correspondence. The first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model ID identified by the access control device .
  • the device further includes:
  • the second acquiring module is configured to acquire the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
  • the fifth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
  • the first storage module is used to store the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  • the device further includes:
  • the third receiving module is configured to receive a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
  • the sixth determining module is configured to determine a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, one or more The third access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
  • the third sending module is used to send the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  • the device further includes:
  • the third acquisition module is used to acquire multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved;
  • the seventh determining module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
  • the second storage module is configured to store the identities of one or more third access point devices according to the identities of the first access point devices.
  • the seventh determining module includes:
  • the determining sub-module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
  • the identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record are determined as the identification of one or more third access point devices.
  • the first determining module is used to:
  • Each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the access point device combination are all the first access point devices;
  • multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination use different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to succeed One or more terminals belonging to the reference model are guided to roam as a standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
  • an access point device in a fifth aspect, includes a processor and a memory, and the memory is configured to store a program for executing the roaming guidance method provided in the first aspect, and to store The data involved in the roaming guidance method provided in the first aspect described above.
  • the processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory.
  • the operating device of the storage device may further include a communication bus, and the communication bus is used to establish a connection between the processor and the memory.
  • an access control device in a sixth aspect, includes a processor and a memory, and the memory is configured to store a program for executing the roaming guidance method provided in the second aspect above, and to store The data involved in the roaming guidance method provided by the above second aspect.
  • the processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory.
  • the operating device of the storage device may further include a communication bus, and the communication bus is used to establish a connection between the processor and the memory.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the second aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the first aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the second aspect.
  • a roaming guidance system includes: a plurality of access point devices, an access control device, and a target terminal; the plurality of access point devices includes a first access point device; The first access point device is used to implement the steps of the method described in the first aspect, and the access control device is used to implement the steps of the method described in the second aspect.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the reference model is the model of the target terminal, so refer to the roaming guidance condition It is not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal.
  • the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a roaming process provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation environment provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of another implementation environment provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a data access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • BSS The service provided by a single access point device is called BSS.
  • ESS The unified service provided by multiple access point devices using the same access control device and provided with the same service set identifier (SSID) is called ESS. That is, one ESS can include multiple BSSs.
  • SSID service set identifier
  • the state in which the terminal establishes a communication connection with the access point device The terminal is associated with a certain access point device, that is, the terminal accesses the access point device, and then can access the access point device, or the access point device can provide services for the terminal.
  • Roaming The process of a terminal switching between different BSSs in the same ESS is called roaming.
  • one access point device corresponds to one BSS, and one ESS can include multiple BSSs.
  • the process of the terminal switching from the association with one access point device to the association with another access point device is called roaming.
  • the ESS includes two BSSs, one BSS corresponds to the access point device 1, and the other BSS corresponds to the access point device 2.
  • the terminal initially associates with the access point device 1 at the location point A, and when the terminal moves to the location point A', the terminal associates with the access point device 2. That is, the terminal associates with the access point device 1 before roaming, and associates with the access point device 2 after roaming.
  • a mobile terminal device also called a mobile terminal.
  • the terminal is also called a station (station, STA).
  • the terminal may be a notebook computer (also called a personal computer (PC)), a game console, a tablet computer, a smart phone, an e-reader, a digital broadcasting terminal, a messaging device, Personal digital assistant or wearable device, etc.
  • the wearable device can be a bracelet or a watch.
  • Signal strength The strength of the signal sent by the access point device received by the terminal, in dbm.
  • the signal strength is generally negative, and the larger the value, the better the signal quality. In most scenarios, -50 and above are considered to have very good signal quality, and -70 and below are considered to be poor.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation environment involved in a roaming guidance method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network architecture involved in this implementation environment includes an access control device 201, multiple access point devices 202 (three access point devices schematically represent the multiple access point devices in FIG. 2), and a target terminal 203.
  • the access control device 201 and the multiple access point devices 202 are respectively connected through a wireless or wired network for communication.
  • the target terminal 203 may be connected to one of the multiple access point devices 202 through a wireless or wired network to communicate. That is, the target terminal 203 can be associated with one of the multiple access point devices 202.
  • the access control device 201 can manage the multiple access point devices 202.
  • the access control device 201 can uniformly issue configurations and perform software upgrades for the multiple access point devices 202, and can also control the number of access point devices in a working state according to a time period, and so on.
  • the access point device associated with the target terminal 203 can provide services for the target terminal 203.
  • the target terminal 203 may sequentially send data packets to other devices through the access point device associated with the target terminal 203 and the access control device 201, or it may sequentially use the access control device 201 and the access control device 201 associated with the target terminal 203 to send data packets.
  • the access point device receives data messages sent by other devices and so on.
  • the access control device 201 can also determine the model identifier of the target terminal 203 through the MAC address of the target terminal 203, and perform multiple operations on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the secondary guidance test determines functions such as reference roaming guidance conditions and determining the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device.
  • the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal 203.
  • One or more terminals belonging to the reference model can include the target terminal 203, and the reference roaming guidance condition can also be referred to as the model of one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. Terminal portrait.
  • the access point device 202 may also perform roaming guidance for the target terminal 203 and exchange signal strength with the target terminal 203 and other functions.
  • the access control device 201 may include a terminal identification module, a guidance condition determination module, and a roaming device determination module
  • the access point device 202 may include a roaming guidance control module and a terminal interaction module.
  • the terminal identification module is used to identify the MAC address of the target terminal 203 from the data message sent by the target terminal 203, and then determine the model identifier of the target terminal 203 through the MAC address of the target terminal 203.
  • the guidance condition determination module is used to perform multiple guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to determine the reference roaming guidance condition.
  • the roaming device determining module is used to determine the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device 202.
  • the roaming device determining module is configured to periodically determine the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device 202 by means of reinforcement learning.
  • the roaming guidance control module is used to determine when to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal 203 according to the reference roaming guidance condition, and is also used to determine the roaming recommended to the target terminal 203 after it can be associated according to the roaming device list determined by the access control device 201 Access point device.
  • the terminal interaction module is used to measure the signal strength received by the target terminal 203.
  • the network involved in the implementation environment may be a WLAN.
  • the network architecture involved in the implementation environment can be deployed in a variety of areas such as shopping malls, supermarkets, office buildings, or parking lots.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device may be the access control device 201 shown in FIG. 2 or the access point device 202.
  • the network device may include one or more processors 401, a communication bus 402, a memory 403, and one or more communication interfaces 404.
  • the processor 401 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a microprocessor, or may be one or more integrated circuits used to implement the solutions of the present application, for example , Application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (programmable logic device, PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • ASIC Application-specific integrated circuit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof.
  • the communication bus 402 is used to transfer information between the above-mentioned components.
  • the communication bus 402 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in the figure, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the memory 403 may be read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), or electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. , EEPROM), optical discs (including compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM), compact discs, laser discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or Any other medium used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and which can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the memory 403 may exist independently and is connected to the processor 401 through the communication bus 402.
  • the memory 403 may also be integrated with the processor 401.
  • the communication interface 404 uses any device such as a transceiver for communicating with other devices or a communication network.
  • the communication interface 404 includes a wired communication interface, and may also include a wireless communication interface.
  • the wired communication interface may be, for example, an Ethernet interface.
  • the Ethernet interface can be an optical interface, an electrical interface, or a combination thereof.
  • the wireless communication interface may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) interface, a cellular network communication interface, or a combination thereof.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the network device may include multiple processors, such as the processor 401 and the processor 405 as shown in FIG. 4. Each of these processors can be a single-core processor or a multi-core processor.
  • the processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (such as computer program instructions).
  • the network device may further include an output device 406 and an input device 407.
  • the output device 406 communicates with the processor 401 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 406 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc.
  • the input device 407 communicates with the processor 401, and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 407 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
  • the memory 403 is used to store the program code 410 for executing the solution of the present application, and the processor 401 may execute the program code 410 stored in the memory 403.
  • the program code may include one or more software modules, and the network device may implement the roaming guidance method provided in the embodiment of FIG. 5 below through the processor 401 and the program code 410 in the memory 403.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a roaming guidance method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method includes the following steps.
  • Step 501 The first access point device determines the signal strength of each of the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, and obtains one or more signal strengths, one or more
  • the second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device.
  • the first access point device may send a strength acquisition request to the target terminal. After the target terminal receives the strength acquisition request, it can determine the signal strength of each of the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, thereby obtaining one or more signal strengths, and then One or more signal strengths are sent to the first access point device.
  • the access point device usually broadcasts beacon frames periodically. Therefore, the target terminal can determine the signal strength of the beacon frames broadcast by the one or more second access point devices, so as to receive The signal strength of the beacon frame broadcast to the one or more second access point devices is determined to be the signal strength when the one or more second access point devices communicate with the target terminal, that is, the above one Or multiple signal strengths.
  • the target terminal can also determine the one or more second access point devices and the target through other radio frequency signals transmitted by one or more second access point devices. The signal strength of the terminal during communication.
  • the first access point device may notify one or more second access point devices, and the one or more second access point devices determine the signal strength when communicating with the target terminal, and obtain One or more signal strengths, and then the corresponding second access point device sends the determined signal strength to the first access point device.
  • the target terminal in order to achieve the association between the target terminal and the access point device, the target terminal usually also has radio frequency functions. Therefore, one or more second access point devices can determine the target through the radio frequency signal transmitted by the target terminal. The signal strength when the terminal communicates with itself.
  • some common roaming guidance conditions are: the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2. Or the value of the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value of 3, and so on.
  • the roaming guidance conditions are different, one or more second access point devices will also be different.
  • the roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, and one or more second access point devices may be the first access point devices.
  • the roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2, and one or more second access point devices may be neighboring access point devices of the first access point device.
  • the roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value 3, one or more second access point devices can be the first access point device and The neighbor access point device of the first access point device.
  • the first access point device determines one or more signal strengths, it can determine whether one or more second access point devices are the first access point device or the first access point according to the reference roaming guide conditions.
  • the neighbor access point device of the point device, or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device and the first access point device are the first access point device or the first access point according to the reference roaming guide conditions.
  • determining one or more second access point devices according to the reference roaming guidance condition is only an implementation method, and the first access point device can also directly connect the first access point device with the neighbors of the first access point device.
  • the in-point device is determined to be one or more second access point devices, so that one or more signal strengths are determined, and then the corresponding signal strength is selected according to the reference roaming guide condition.
  • the aforementioned neighboring access point device of the first access point device may be one or more third access point devices included in the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device.
  • the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device will be described in detail later, and there will be no more explanation here.
  • Step 502 The first access point device determines a reference roaming guidance condition.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the reference model is Refers to the model of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device may obtain the reference roaming guidance condition from the access control device according to the model identifier of the target terminal in an active manner or a passive manner.
  • the first access point device receives and stores the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device. In this way, the first access point device can directly determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the access control device after determining that the access control device obtains the first correspondence relationship, it may actively send the first correspondence relationship to the first access point device. Later, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, it may first determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal. In this way, during the roaming guidance process, there is no need for the first access point device to interact with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions, but to directly follow the model identifier of the target terminal from the first correspondence stored locally Determining the reference roaming guide condition reduces the number of interactions between the first access point device and the access control device, thereby saving overhead.
  • the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device, that is, different model identifiers may correspond to different roaming guidance conditions.
  • the roaming guidance condition may include two parts, one part is the roaming guidance rule, and the other part is the guidance threshold.
  • the access control device can determine multiple access terminals.
  • an access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device, and the source access point devices included in the multiple access point device combinations are all the first access point devices Point devices, and an access point device combination can correspond to multiple different signal strength combinations.
  • a signal strength combination includes the signal strength of the corresponding source access point device and the signal strength of the corresponding destination access point device.
  • the roaming guidance conditions include not only roaming guidance rules, but also guidance thresholds. Therefore, the access control device performs multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, not only can determine the roaming guidance rules followed by one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, but also the guidance threshold.
  • the first access point device receiving and storing the first correspondence sent by the access control device may be as shown in Table 1 below. Assuming that the model identifier of the target terminal determined by the first access point device is 146, then the first access point device can determine the roaming in the reference roaming guidance condition from the following table 1 according to the model identifier of the target terminal
  • the guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10.
  • the rule R1 in the foregoing Table 1 may mean that the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, and the value 1 may be the corresponding guiding threshold -75.
  • the rule R2 in Table 1 above may mean that the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2, and the value 2 may be the corresponding guiding threshold -60.
  • the rule R3 in Table 1 above may mean that the value of the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value 3, and the value 3 may be the corresponding guide threshold value 10.
  • the above-mentioned rules R1, R2, and R3 may also refer to other rules.
  • roaming guidance conditions include roaming guidance rules and guidance thresholds
  • the access control device can determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple signal strength combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and then determine the One or more terminals of the reference model perform multiple roaming guidance tests to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the signal strength in some other embodiments, other features can also be combined to determine the roaming guidance condition.
  • the channel, frequency band (2.4G, 5G), and the load of the access point device these characteristics will affect the size of the boot threshold.
  • the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10; on channel 149, the roaming guidance rule is still rule R3, but the guidance threshold is changed to 8.
  • a 2.4G frequency band and a 5G frequency band exist at the same time for an access point device.
  • roaming scenarios are divided into four situations, namely: 2.4G roaming to 5G, 5G roaming to 2.4G, 2.4G roaming to 2.4G, and 5G roaming to 5G. Because most terminals support preferential access to the 5G frequency band, these four scenarios generally have an impact on the guidance threshold.
  • the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10; for the scenario of 2.4G roaming to 5G, the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, The guide threshold is 8; for this scenario where 5G roams to 2.4G, the roaming guide rule is rule R3, and the guide threshold is 12.
  • the terminal preferentially chooses to roam to an access point device with a light load.
  • the boot threshold may be affected.
  • the access control device determines the combination of multiple access point devices, it can not only perform roaming guidance tests according to different signal strengths, but also perform roaming guidance tests based on parameters such as channels, frequency bands, and access point device loads. That is, the access point device can perform multiple roaming guidance tests according to one or more of the characteristics of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load of the access point device to determine the reference roaming guidance condition.
  • the access control device can determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and each access point device combination includes the identity and purpose of the source access point device.
  • the identifier of the access point device, and the source access point devices in the multiple access point device combinations are all the first access point devices.
  • the access control device uses different pilot test conditions to roam one or more terminals belonging to the reference model multiple times
  • the guidance test is to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions based on the successful guidance of one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam.
  • the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
  • the access control device after the access control device performs multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model according to the above-mentioned method, it can select the guidance test conditions for successfully guiding this type of terminal to roam, and test the selected guidance.
  • the conditions are processed, and the reference roaming guidance conditions are obtained.
  • the selected guide test conditions when the selected guide test conditions are all the same, the selected guide test conditions can be directly used as the reference roaming guide conditions.
  • the selected guided test conditions are different, for example, the guided test rules are not completely the same, and/or the guided test thresholds are not completely the same, the selected guided test conditions can be processed to obtain the reference roaming guide conditions.
  • the guided test rules and the corresponding guided test thresholds in the selected guided test conditions can be determined, the frequency of each guided test rule can be determined, and the guided test threshold corresponding to the guided test rule with the highest frequency of occurrence can be determined.
  • the guide test rule with the most frequent occurrence is used as the roaming guide rule in the reference roaming guide condition, and the average of the guide test thresholds corresponding to the guide test rule with the most frequent occurrence is used as the guide threshold in the reference roaming guide condition.
  • the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal in a variety of ways.
  • the model identifier is determined by the access control device, that is, if the first access point device wants to learn the model identifier of the target terminal, it needs to obtain it from the access control device. In other words, the first access point device can obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  • two ways for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal will be introduced.
  • the first access point device sends a model query request to the access control device, and the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the access control device receives the model query request sent by the first access point device, and determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence is used to indicate the access The model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the access control device. After that, the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
  • the second corresponding relationship is stored in the access control device in advance, and when the first access point device needs to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, the first access point device can communicate with the access point device.
  • the access control device sends a model query request.
  • the access control device can determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device.
  • the access control device can determine the terminal according to the data packet sent by the terminal.
  • the MAC address of the terminal is further determined to determine the model identifier of the terminal, so as to create a second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the terminal and the model identifier.
  • the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  • the data message sent by the target terminal will carry its own MAC address and model description information.
  • the http message may carry the MAC address of the target terminal
  • the user-agent field of the http message may carry the model description information of the target terminal. Therefore, the access control device can obtain the MAC address and model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the model description information can be huawei P30, iphone 8, and so on.
  • the access control device can distinguish different models of terminals according to the different model description information. That is, taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may directly use the model description information of the target terminal as the model identifier of the target terminal. Of course, the access control device can also distinguish the model type of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and then assign a corresponding model identifier to the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence stored by the access control device is shown in Table 2 below, and the model identifier in Table 2 is the model identifier assigned by the access control device to the terminal according to the model description information of the terminal.
  • the access control device determines that the model identifier of the target terminal is 146 from the second correspondence shown in Table 2 below according to the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
  • the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and determines the target terminal's model identifier from the stored second correspondence according to the target terminal's MAC address, and sends it to the first An access point device sends the model identifier of the target terminal. After that, the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
  • the access control device after the access control device receives the data message sent by the target terminal, it can directly obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message, and then obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the first data message according to the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal after the model identifier of the target terminal is determined, it is directly sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device can actively determine the model identifier of the target terminal and issue it to the first access point device, so that it is not necessary for the first access point device to guide the target terminal to the access control device when roaming.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal which can reduce the interaction between the first access point device and the access control device during roaming guidance of the target terminal, thereby improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
  • the first access point device may directly determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the access control device receives the first guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, determines the reference roaming guide condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and sends it to the first access point device Send reference roaming guidance conditions. Therefore, the first access point device can receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
  • the access control device determines the first correspondence, it does not deliver the first correspondence to the first access point device. Instead, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends the first guidance condition acquisition request carrying the model identifier of the target terminal to the access control device, and then the access control The device determines the reference roaming guide condition from the first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and then sends it to the first access point device. In this way, after the reference roaming guidance condition is updated, it can be ensured that the first access point device can obtain the reference roaming guidance condition with higher accuracy in time.
  • the first access point device may The corresponding relationship between the model identifier of the terminal and the corresponding roaming guidance condition is stored locally. In this way, after the first access point device determines the model identifier of the target terminal, the first access point device may first query whether the reference roaming guide condition is stored locally according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first access point device can send a first guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the access control device can then use the target terminal's model identification After determining the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence, send it to the first access point device. If the reference roaming guidance condition is stored locally in the first access point device, the first access point device does not need to interact with the access control device, thereby reducing the number of interactions and improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
  • the method for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal may refer to the method in the first manner described above, which is not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned second method can not only be used to obtain the reference roaming guidance condition when the target terminal performs roaming guidance, but also can be used to update the reference roaming guidance condition stored locally in the first access point device. That is, after the access control device updates the first correspondence relationship with reference to the roaming guide condition, the first access point device may also obtain the updated roaming guide condition from the access control device in the second manner described above.
  • the first access point device may not only determine the reference roaming guidance condition through the model identifier of the target terminal according to the above two methods, in other embodiments, the first access point device may also Determine the reference roaming guidance conditions by other means. For example, the first access point device may determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the first access point device may determine the MAC address of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guide condition from the access control device according to the MAC address of the target terminal. Next, this will be explained in detail through the following third method.
  • the first access point device sends a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence is used for Indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the access control device.
  • the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device.
  • the first access point device receives the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
  • the first access point device does not need to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and may directly send the second guide condition acquisition request carrying the MAC address of the target terminal to the access control device.
  • the access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request, it determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then according to the model identifier of the target terminal, from the first corresponding In the relationship, determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the first access point device interacts with the access control device once to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions without first interacting with the access control device to determine the reference model. Identification, and then use the model identification to perform a secondary interaction with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions. That is, the number of interactions with the access control device is reduced, thereby saving overhead.
  • Step 503 If it is determined based on the one or more signal strengths that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, and the roaming guidance instruction carries the information of one or more reference access point devices. Identification, the roaming guidance instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of the one or more reference access point devices.
  • the first access point device may determine whether the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition according to the one or more signal strengths. If the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device may send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device through multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal, refer to the roaming guidance condition and target
  • the built-in roaming rules in the terminal are not much different. In this way, when the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, sending a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal can guarantee the success of the roaming guidance of the target terminal with a high probability. In other words, referring to the roaming guidance conditions can guarantee the success of the roaming guidance of the target terminal with a high probability.
  • the identification of one or more reference access point devices may be determined before the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal.
  • the first access point device may obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, where the roaming device list includes the identities of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access points The point device is the neighbor access point device of the first access point device.
  • the first access point device may determine as one or more third access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
  • a third access point device with reference to the access point device may be determined.
  • the one or more second access point devices may include one or more third access point devices.
  • the first access point device determines from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list the implementation process of the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices. This is: according to the roaming device list, a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition is selected from one or more third access point devices to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
  • the first access point device can obtain the roaming device list from the access control device in an active or passive manner, and thereby select the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from the roaming device list , And use the identification of the selected third access point device as the identification of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the complete implementation process of determining the identity of one or more reference access point devices is introduced in the following two ways.
  • the first access point device receives and stores a roaming device list sent by the access control device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, and the one or more third access point devices
  • the access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device.
  • the first access point device can select the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guidance condition from the roaming device list, and select The identifier of the third access point device serves as the identifier of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the access control device may determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and send the roaming device list to the corresponding access point device. Taking the first access point device as an example, after determining the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device, the access control device may send the roaming device list to the first access point device. Since the roaming device list includes the identities of all other access point devices that can roam from the first access point device, but some access point devices may not meet the reference roaming guide conditions, so the first access point device Before sending the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guidance condition can be selected from the roaming device list as the identity of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the access control device may actively send the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. In this way, when the first access point device subsequently guides the target terminal in roaming, the identification of one or more reference access point devices can be directly determined from the roaming guide list without interacting with the access control device, reducing ⁇ overhead.
  • the first access point device receives and stores the roaming device list sent by the access control device including an identifier of the third access point device.
  • the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, assuming that the first access point device determines that the third access point device in the roaming device list meets the reference roaming guidance condition, then the first access point The device may directly use the identifier of the third access point device in the roaming guide list as the identifier of the reference access point device.
  • the access control device when the access control device delivers the roaming device list to the first access point device, it may also send the number of access point devices included in the roaming device list below.
  • the first access point device sends a list acquisition request to the access control device, and the list acquisition request carries the identity of the first access point device.
  • the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and determines a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, and the roaming device list includes one or more first access point devices.
  • the identifier of the third access point device, and the one or more third access point devices are neighbor access point devices of the first access point device. After that, the access control device sends the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  • the first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device, and selects the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from the roaming device list, and sets the identity of the selected third access point device
  • the identifier serves as the identifier of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the access control device may determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and then store the device identification of each access point device and the corresponding roaming device list in the device identification and roaming device list. Correspondence between the lists. In this way, when the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device, it can compare the stored device identification with the identification of the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device. In the correspondence between the roaming device lists, the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is determined, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device may determine the identity of one or more corresponding third access point devices for different access point devices, and then, the access control device may assign the device of each access point device
  • the identifier and the corresponding identifier of one or more third access point devices are stored in the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. That is, the identifier of each access point device is used as the first device identifier, the identifier of the third access point device corresponding to each access point device is used as the second device identifier, and the device identifier of each access point device is combined with The identities of the corresponding one or more third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity.
  • the identity of the first access point device can be used as the first device identity, from In the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier, determine the corresponding one or more second device identifiers, and then use the determined one or more second device identifiers as one corresponding to the first access point device Or the identities of multiple third access point devices. Then, a roaming device list including the identities of the one or more third access point devices is generated, and the roaming device list is sent to the first access point device.
  • the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device, it does not generate a roaming device list and send it to the first access point device. Instead, the corresponding relationship between the device identifier and the roaming device list is stored, or the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier is stored.
  • the access control device may determine the first A roaming device list corresponding to the access point device, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device, so that when the roaming guide list corresponding to the first access point device is updated It can ensure that the first access point device can obtain a list of roaming devices with higher accuracy.
  • the first access point device sends a list acquisition request to the access control device, and the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device as 48f8-db86-3460.
  • the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and according to the identification of the first access point device, determines the corresponding roaming from the corresponding relationship between the device identification and the roaming device list shown in Table 3 below.
  • the device list includes a third access point device, and the identifier of the third access point device is 48f8-db79-2420.
  • the access control device sends the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  • the first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device. Assuming that the third access point device in the roaming device list meets the reference roaming guide condition, the first access point device can directly roam the device.
  • the identifier of this third access point device in the boot list is used as the identifier of the reference access point device.
  • the access control device may also determine one or more corresponding roaming devices of the first access point device.
  • the identity of the third access point device That is: the access control device obtains multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved.
  • the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • the access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
  • the access control device may store the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list, and may also store the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. Therefore, the access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device. Or multiple third access point device identifiers to generate a roaming device list, that is, a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. After that, the access control device can combine the identifier of the first access point device with the first access point device. The roaming device list corresponding to the in-point device is stored in the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list.
  • the access control device may use the identity of the first access point device as the first device identity, use the identity of the third access point device corresponding to the first access point device as the second device identity, and use the first access point device as the second device identity.
  • the identification of the point device and the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device are stored in the correspondence between the first device identification and the second device identification.
  • the first access point device can report to the access control device its signal strength when communicating with the target terminal, and can also report to the access control device that it sends to the target terminal. Information such as the identification of one or more reference access point devices and the number of guides carried in the roaming guidance instruction. In the same way, other access point devices can also report the above information to the access control device. For example, suppose that the target terminal roams to a reference access point device among the one or more reference access point devices, and this reference access point device can report the signal strength of itself when communicating with the target terminal to the access control device.
  • the access control device can determine a roaming record based on this information, the identity of the source access point device in the roaming record is the identity of the first access point device, and the identity of the destination access point device is the identity of the roaming
  • the roaming experience indication information can be determined according to the signal strength before roaming and the signal strength after roaming.
  • the access control device can determine multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • the access control device determines one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device based on the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record
  • the identifier includes: the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • the access control device determines the identity of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record as the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device.
  • the access control device may determine one or the corresponding roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning according to the multiple historical roaming records. Identities of multiple third access point devices. That is, the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device obtains the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records. The access control device determines the identification of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record and the acquired identification of the neighbor access point device as one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device The identification of the device.
  • reinforcement learning is a type of AI algorithm.
  • Reinforcement learning refers to a goal-oriented algorithm.
  • This learning algorithm can make the determined one or more third access point devices more accurate. That is, the one or more third access point devices determined by means of reinforcement learning are access point devices with improved signal quality after roaming from the first access point device.
  • multiple historical roaming records include access point devices that have been guided by roaming before, but the access point devices that have not been guided by roaming may also be access point devices with improved signal quality, so they can also be included in the The neighbor access point device of the multiple historical roaming records serves as the third access point device.
  • the neighbor access point devices that are not included in the multiple historical roaming records can be determined according to certain rules.
  • the access control device may determine the number of access point devices of the first type, where the first type of access point devices refers to the destination access point devices in the historical roaming record of improved roaming signal quality. After that, the access control device can divide the number of access point devices of the first type by the reference ratio to obtain the number of access point devices of the second type.
  • the second type of access point devices are those that are not included in the multiple historical roaming
  • the reference ratio refers to the ratio of the number of access point devices of the first type to the access point devices of the second type in one or more third access point devices. In this way, the access control device can select the neighbor access point device as the third access point device from the neighbor access point devices that have never been included in the multiple historical roaming records according to the number of the second type of access point devices.
  • the access control device can not only use 4 access point devices of the first type as the third access point device, but can also select one of the neighbor access point devices that have not been included in the multiple historical roaming records for access.
  • the point device serves as the third access point device.
  • the first type of access point device can guarantee the success of roaming guidance with a high probability, that is, it can guarantee the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • some neighbor access point devices that are not included in the historical roaming record can be added.
  • the number of access point devices of the first type is greater than the number of access point devices of the second type. That is, the number of access point devices of the first type accounts for a larger proportion than the number of access point devices of the second type.
  • the above-mentioned determination of the number of access point devices of the second type according to the reference ratio is only an implementation method. In other embodiments, it can also be determined in other ways, as long as the number of access point devices of the first type is The quantity ratio can be larger than the quantity ratio of the second type of access point devices.
  • reinforcement learning may be performed periodically, and each time reinforcement learning is performed, the determined one or more third access point devices become more precise.
  • the neighbor access point devices of the first access point device included in the one or more second access point devices may be determined through the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device.
  • the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device can be obtained according to the related implementation of the above two methods, that is, the roaming device list proactively pushed by the access control device can be received, or the roaming device list can be sent to the access control device. After the device sends the list acquisition request, it receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • Step 504 The target terminal receives the roaming guidance instruction sent by the first access point device, and performs roaming according to the identification of one or more reference access point devices carried in the roaming guidance instruction.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined after the access control device performs multiple guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, the reference model is the model of the target terminal, but the reference roaming guidance condition may not necessarily match the target The built-in roaming rules in the terminal match. Therefore, after the target terminal receives the roaming guidance instruction sent by the first access point device, it can determine whether there is a reference access point device that meets the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal among the one or more reference access point devices. If it exists, the target terminal can roam according to the identity of the reference access point device that meets its own built-in roaming rules, that is, switch from the association with the first access point device to the reference that meets its own built-in roaming rules The association of the access point device.
  • the target terminal will not roam. That is, the association with the first access point device is maintained.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model
  • the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming guidance conditions and the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal are not much different.
  • the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the device is located in a first access point device.
  • the device can be implemented as part or all of the first access point device by software, hardware, or a combination of the two.
  • the device includes: a first determining module 601 and a first sending module 602.
  • the first determining module 601 is used to determine the signal strength of each second access point device in the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, to obtain one or more signal strengths, and one or more first
  • the second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device;
  • the first determining module 601 is further configured to determine, according to the one or more signal strengths, that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition;
  • the first sending module 602 is configured to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal when the first determining module determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition.
  • the roaming guidance instruction carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and the roaming guidance The instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model.
  • the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal
  • the third determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
  • the device further includes:
  • the first receiving module is configured to receive and store the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device;
  • the third determining module is used to:
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the first corresponding relationship.
  • the third determining module includes:
  • the first sending submodule is configured to send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
  • the first receiving sub-module receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device, and the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device.
  • the second determining module includes:
  • the obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  • the obtaining submodule includes:
  • the sending unit is configured to send a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device ;or
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
  • the model identifier of the target terminal is the access control device after obtaining the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and then through the target terminal The MAC address is determined.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second sending module is configured to send a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
  • the reference roaming guide condition is that after the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal, the first corresponding stored in itself Determined in the relationship, the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the device further includes:
  • the obtaining module is used to obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list includes the identification of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are the first access point devices Neighbor access point equipment;
  • the fourth determining module is configured to determine the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
  • the acquisition module includes:
  • the second receiving submodule is used to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • the second sending submodule is configured to send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the third receiving submodule is configured to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
  • the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices
  • the fourth determining module includes:
  • the selection submodule is used to select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming The guiding conditions are not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • the roaming guidance device provided in the above embodiment only uses the division of the above functional modules for example during roaming guidance.
  • the above functions can be allocated by different functional modules according to needs, i.e.
  • the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
  • the roaming guidance device provided in the foregoing embodiment and the roaming guidance method embodiment belong to the same concept, and the specific implementation process is detailed in the method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the device is located in an access control device.
  • the device can be implemented as part or all of the access control equipment by software, hardware or a combination of the two.
  • the device includes: a first determining module 701 and a first sending module 702.
  • the first determining module 701 is configured to determine a reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
  • the first sending module 702 is configured to send a reference roaming guide condition to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device refers to An access point device controlled by the access control device.
  • the first sending module is used to:
  • the first correspondence is sent to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  • the device further includes:
  • a first receiving module configured to receive a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by a first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries a model identifier of the target terminal;
  • the second determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device Guidance conditions.
  • the device further includes:
  • the first obtaining module is used to obtain the media access control MAC address of the target terminal
  • the third determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device.
  • the second sending module is configured to send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  • the first obtaining module includes:
  • the receiving sub-module is configured to receive the model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
  • the fourth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal.
  • the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device.
  • Model ID According to the model ID of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the stored first correspondence. The first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model ID identified by the access control device .
  • the device further includes:
  • the second acquiring module is configured to acquire the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
  • the fifth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
  • the first storage module is used to store the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  • the device further includes:
  • the third receiving module is configured to receive a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
  • the sixth determining module is configured to determine a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, one or more The third access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
  • the third sending module is used to send the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  • the device further includes:
  • the third acquisition module is used to acquire multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
  • Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved;
  • the seventh determining module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
  • the second storage module is configured to store the identities of one or more third access point devices according to the identities of the first access point devices.
  • the seventh determining module includes:
  • the determining sub-module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
  • the identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record are determined as the identification of one or more third access point devices.
  • the first determining module is used to:
  • Each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device.
  • the source access point devices in the access point device combination are all the first access point devices;
  • multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination use different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to succeed One or more terminals belonging to the reference model are guided to roam as a standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
  • the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
  • the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming The guiding conditions are not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
  • the roaming guidance device provided in the above embodiment only uses the division of the above-mentioned functional modules for example during roaming guidance.
  • the above-mentioned function allocation can be completed by different functional modules as needed, i.e.
  • the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
  • the roaming guidance device provided in the foregoing embodiment and the roaming guidance method embodiment belong to the same concept, and the specific implementation process is detailed in the method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example: floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical medium (for example: digital versatile disc (DVD)) or semiconductor medium (for example: solid state disk (SSD)) Wait.
  • the computer-readable storage medium mentioned in this application may be a non-volatile storage medium, in other words, it may be a non-transitory storage medium.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications, and disclosed thereby are a roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, a storage medium, and a system. In the present application, a reference roaming guidance condition is determined by an access control device performing a plurality of roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals that belong to a reference model, the reference model being a model of a target terminal; therefore, the reference roaming guidance condition is similar to a roaming rule built into the target terminal. As such, when a first access point device acquires the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal satisfies the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, same can still most likely guide the target terminal to successfully roam. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if the built-in roaming rules of different types of terminals are different, the success rate of roaming guidance can be improved by performing roaming guidance according to the described method.

Description

漫游引导方法、装置、设备、存储介质及系统Roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium and system
本申请要求于2020年3月27日提交的申请号为202010229128.0、发明名称为“漫游引导方法、装置、设备、存储介质及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed on March 27, 2020 with the application number 202010229128.0 and the title of the invention "roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium and system", the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,特别涉及一种漫游引导方法、装置、设备、存储介质及系统。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium, and system.
背景技术Background technique
无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN)包括两种架构,其中的一种架构包括接入控制设备(access controller,AC)和多个接入点设备(access point,AP),接入控制设备用于管理和控制该多个接入点设备,接入点设备用于为终端提供服务。其中,一个接入点设备对应一个基本服务集(basic service set,BSS),该多个接入点设备可以对应一个扩展服务集(extended service set,ESS),也即是,ESS可以包括多个BSS。终端在ESS中的不同BSS之间切换的过程可以称为漫游。为了提升漫游体验,如何进行漫游引导成为目前亟待解决的问题。Wireless local area network (WLAN) includes two architectures. One architecture includes access controller (AC) and multiple access point devices (AP). To manage and control the multiple access point devices, the access point devices are used to provide services for the terminal. Among them, one access point device corresponds to a basic service set (basic service set, BSS), and the multiple access point devices can correspond to an extended service set (extended service set, ESS), that is, the ESS can include multiple BSS. The process of the terminal switching between different BSSs in the ESS can be referred to as roaming. In order to improve the roaming experience, how to conduct roaming guidance has become an urgent problem to be solved at present.
相关技术提出了一种漫游引导方法,包括:第一接入点设备检测自身与目标终端通信时的信号强度,目标终端是指与第一接入点设备关联的一个终端,第一接入点设备为上述多个接入点设备中的一个。如果该信号强度小于或等于强度阈值,则向目标终端发送基本服务迁移管理(BSS transition management,BTM)报文,BTM报文携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,BTM报文用于引导目标终端漫游到一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个接入点设备,该一个或多个参考接入点设备是指第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备中与目标终端通信时信号强度较强的接入点设备。The related art proposes a roaming guidance method, which includes: the first access point device detects the signal strength when it communicates with a target terminal, the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device, and the first access point The device is one of the aforementioned multiple access point devices. If the signal strength is less than or equal to the strength threshold, a basic service transition management (BSS transition management, BTM) message is sent to the target terminal. The BTM message carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and the BTM message is used to Instruct the target terminal to roam to an access point device among one or more reference access point devices. The one or more reference access point devices refer to the neighboring access point devices of the first access point device and the target terminal An access point device with strong signal strength during communication.
然而,目标终端并不是无条件服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,也即是,目标终端自身存储有一套漫游规则,从而确定是否接受第一接入点设备的漫游引导。而且,不同型号的终端遵从的漫游规则可能不同,所以,按照上述方法进行漫游引导,导致漫游引导的成功率较低。However, the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, that is, the target terminal itself stores a set of roaming rules to determine whether to accept the roaming guidance of the first access point device. Moreover, different types of terminals may comply with different roaming rules. Therefore, roaming guidance is performed according to the above method, resulting in a lower success rate of roaming guidance.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种漫游引导方法、装置、设备、存储介质及系统,可以提高漫游引导的成功率。所述技术方案如下:This application provides a roaming guidance method, device, equipment, storage medium and system, which can improve the success rate of roaming guidance. The technical solution is as follows:
第一方面,提供了一种漫游引导方法,在该方法中,第一接入点设备确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括第一接入点设备和/或第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,目标终端是指与第一接入点设备关联的一个终端。如果根据一个或多个信号强度确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件,则第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令,漫游引导指令 携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,漫游引导指令用于引导目标终端漫游到一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型是指目标终端的款型。In a first aspect, a roaming guidance method is provided, in which the first access point device determines the signal when each second access point device of one or more second access point devices communicates with the target terminal Strength to obtain one or more signal strengths, one or more second access point devices include the first access point device and/or neighbor access point devices of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to the first access point device A terminal associated with the access point device. If it is determined based on one or more signal strengths that the target terminal satisfies the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, and the roaming guidance instruction carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and roaming guidance The instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. , The reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
由于参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以,参考漫游引导条件和目标终端内置的漫游规则相差不大。这样,在第一接入点设备获取到参考漫游引导条件,并确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,就算目标终端不是无条件地服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,但是也可以大概率地引导目标终端漫游成功。Since the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming guidance condition and the built-in target terminal The roaming rules are not much different. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully.
可选地,在根据一个或多个信号强度确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件之前,第一接入点设备可以确定目标终端的款型标识,根据目标终端的款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。Optionally, before determining that the target terminal satisfies the reference roaming guidance condition according to one or more signal strengths, the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
其中,第一接入点设备可以按照主动的方式或者被动的方式,根据目标终端的款型标识从接入控制设备中获取参考漫游引导条件。接下来对这两种方式进行介绍。The first access point device may obtain the reference roaming guidance condition from the access control device according to the model identifier of the target terminal in an active manner or a passive manner. Next, we will introduce these two methods.
第一种方式,第一接入点设备接收并存储接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。这样,在第一接入点设备根据款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件时,第一接入点设备可以根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。In the first manner, the first access point device receives and stores the first correspondence sent by the access control device, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device. In this way, when the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier, the first access point device can determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
也即是,在第一种方式中,接入控制设备确定得到第一对应关系之后,可以主动将第一对应关系发送给第一接入点设备。之后,当第一接入点设备需要确定参考漫游引导条件时,可以按照目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件。这样,在漫游引导的过程中,无需第一接入点设备再与接入控制设备来交互获取参考漫游引导条件,而是直接按照目标终端的款型标识,从本地存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,减少了第一接入点设备与接入控制设备之间的交互次数,从而节省了开销。That is, in the first manner, after determining that the access control device obtains the first correspondence relationship, it may actively send the first correspondence relationship to the first access point device. After that, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, it can determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal. In this way, during the roaming guidance process, there is no need for the first access point device to interact with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions, but to directly follow the model identifier of the target terminal from the first correspondence stored locally Determining the reference roaming guide condition reduces the number of interactions between the first access point device and the access control device, thereby saving overhead.
第二种方式,第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识。第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。In the second manner, the first access point device sends a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal. The first access point device receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal. The relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device.
也即是,在第二种方式中,接入控制设备确定第一对应关系之后,并未向第一接入点设备下发第一对应关系。而是在第一接入点设备需要确定参考漫游引导条件时,由第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送携带目标终端的款型标识的第一引导条件获取请求,进而由接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件后,发送给第一接入点设备。这样,在参考漫游引导条件更新后,可以保证第一接入点设备能够及时获取到准确性较高的参考漫游引导条件。That is, in the second manner, after the access control device determines the first correspondence, it does not deliver the first correspondence to the first access point device. Instead, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends the first guidance condition acquisition request carrying the model identifier of the target terminal to the access control device, and then the access control The device determines the reference roaming guide condition from the first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and then sends it to the first access point device. In this way, after the reference roaming guidance condition is updated, it can be ensured that the first access point device can obtain the reference roaming guidance condition with higher accuracy in time.
可选地,第一接入点设备确定目标终端的款型标识的实现过程可以包括:第一接入点设备从接入控制设备中获取目标终端的款型标识。Optionally, the process for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal may include: the first access point device obtains the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
可选地,第一接入点设备从接入控制设备中获取目标终端的款型标识的方式可以包括两种,分别为下述方式(1)和方式(1)。Optionally, the manner in which the first access point device obtains the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device may include two manners, namely the following manner (1) and manner (1).
(1)第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)地址,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的 目标终端的款型标识。(1) The first access point device sends a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control (MAC) address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the access The model identifier of the target terminal sent by the control device.
也即是,在方式(1)中,接入控制设备中事先存储有第二对应关系,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识。当接入控制设备接收到第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求时,可以根据款型查询请求携带的目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中确定目标终端的款型标识,进而将目标终端的款型标识发送给第一接入点设备。这样就无需接入控制设备事先将第二对应关系下发给第一接入点设备,而且在接入控制设备对目标终端的款型标识进行更新的情况下,还可以保证第一接入点设备能够及时获取到准确性较高的款型标识。That is, in the method (1), a second correspondence relationship is stored in the access control device in advance, and the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address identified by the access control device. When the access control device receives the model query request sent by the first access point device, it can determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal carried in the model query request, and then The model identifier of the target terminal is sent to the first access point device. In this way, there is no need for the access control device to issue the second correspondence to the first access point device in advance, and when the access control device updates the model identifier of the target terminal, it can also ensure that the first access point The equipment can obtain the more accurate model identification in time.
(2)第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识,目标终端的款型标识为接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址之后,通过目标终端的MAC地址确定的。(2) The first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device, and the model identifier of the target terminal is after the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal , Determined by the MAC address of the target terminal.
也即是,方式(2)中,在接入控制设备接收到目标终端发送的数据报文之后,可以直接从数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址,然后根据目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识之后,直接发送给第一接入点设备。换句话说,接入控制设备可以主动确定目标终端的款型标识并下发给第一接入点设备,这样就无需第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导时再向接入控制设备来请求目标终端的款型标识,从而可以减少第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导的过程中与接入控制设备的交互,从而可以提高漫游引导的效率。That is, in method (2), after the access control device receives the data message sent by the target terminal, it can directly obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message, and then obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the first data message according to the MAC address of the target terminal. In the second correspondence, after the model identifier of the target terminal is determined, it is directly sent to the first access point device. In other words, the access control device can actively determine the model identifier of the target terminal and issue it to the first access point device, so that it is not necessary for the first access point device to guide the target terminal to the access control device when roaming. To request the model identifier of the target terminal, which can reduce the interaction between the first access point device and the access control device during roaming guidance of the target terminal, thereby improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
关于上述方式(1)和方式(2)中提及的第二对应关系,由于与接入控制设备管理的接入点设备关联的终端发送给其他设备的数据报文都会经过接入控制设备,因此,接入控制设备可以按照终端发送的数据报文来确定终端的MAC地址,进而确定终端的款型标识,从而根据终端的MAC地址和款型标识创建第二对应关系。以目标终端为例,接入控制设备可以从目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型描述信息。接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型描述信息,确定目标终端的款型标识,将目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型标识,存储至第二对应关系中。Regarding the second corresponding relationship mentioned in the above methods (1) and (2), since the data messages sent by the terminal associated with the access point device managed by the access control device to other devices will all pass through the access control device, Therefore, the access control device can determine the MAC address of the terminal according to the data message sent by the terminal, and then determine the model identifier of the terminal, thereby creating a second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the terminal and the model identifier. Taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal. The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
由于不同款型终端的款型描述信息不同,因此,接入控制设备可以按照款型描述信息的不同,来区分不同的款型终端。也即是,以目标终端为例,接入控制设备可以直接将目标终端的款型描述信息作为目标终端的款型标识。当然,接入控制设备也可以按照目标终端的款型描述信息,来区分目标终端的款型,进而为目标终端分配对应的款型标识。Since different models of terminals have different model description information, the access control device can distinguish different models of terminals according to the different model description information. That is, taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may directly use the model description information of the target terminal as the model identifier of the target terminal. Of course, the access control device can also distinguish the model type of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and then assign a corresponding model identifier to the target terminal.
在本申请中,第一接入点设备不仅可以按照上述第一种方式和第二种方式,通过目标终端的款型标识来确定参考漫游引导条件,第一接入点设备还可以通过其他的方式来确定参考漫游引导条件。比如,第一接入点设备可以按照目标终端的MAC地址来确定参考漫游引导条件。也即是,第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址。第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址确定目标终端的款型标识之后,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。In this application, the first access point device can not only determine the reference roaming guidance condition through the model identifier of the target terminal according to the first and second methods mentioned above, but the first access point device can also use other methods. Ways to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions. For example, the first access point device may determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the first access point device sends a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal. The first access point device receives the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device. The reference roaming guide condition is the first corresponding relationship stored by the access control device after determining the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal. The first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
也即是,在这种方式中,第一接入点设备无需确定目标终端的款型标识,可以直接向接入控制设备发送携带有目标终端的MAC地址的第二引导条件获取请求。在接入控制设备接 收到第二引导条件获取请求之后,按照目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,然后按照目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。换句话说,第三种方式中,第一接入点设备与接入控制设备进行一次交互,就可以获取到参考漫游引导条件,而无需先与接入控制设备进行一次交互来确定参考款型标识,再通过款型标识与接入控制设备进行二次交互来获取参考漫游引导条件。也即减少了与接入控制设备的交互次数,从而节省了开销。That is, in this manner, the first access point device does not need to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and can directly send the second guide condition acquisition request carrying the MAC address of the target terminal to the access control device. After the access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request, it determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then according to the model identifier of the target terminal, from the first corresponding In the relationship, determine the reference roaming guidance conditions. In other words, in the third method, the first access point device interacts with the access control device once to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions without first interacting with the access control device to determine the reference model. Identification, and then use the model identification to perform a secondary interaction with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions. That is, the number of interactions with the access control device is reduced, thereby saving overhead.
可选地,第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,还可以确定一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。作为一种示例,第一接入点设备从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。第一接入点设备根据漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设备中确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。Optionally, before the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the identification of one or more reference access point devices may also be determined. As an example, the first access point device obtains a roaming device list from the access control device, and the roaming device list includes the identifiers of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are The neighbor access point device of the first access point device. The first access point device determines the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
第一接入点设备可以通过主动的方式或者被动的方式,从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,也即是,第一接入点设备可以直接接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表;或者,第一接入点设备可以向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,该列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表。The first access point device can obtain the roaming device list from the access control device in an active or passive manner, that is, the first access point device can directly receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device; Alternatively, the first access point device may send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identity of the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
关于第一接入点设备被动获取漫游设备列表的方式,由于接入控制设备可以主动将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。这样,在后续第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导时,可以直接从该漫游引导列表中确定一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,而无需与接入控制设备进行交互,减少了开销。Regarding the manner in which the first access point device passively obtains the roaming device list, because the access control device can actively send the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. In this way, when the first access point device subsequently guides the target terminal in roaming, the identification of one or more reference access point devices can be directly determined from the roaming guide list without interacting with the access control device, reducing了overhead.
关于第一接入点设备主动获取漫游设备列表的方式,接入控制设备可以对不同的接入点设备确定对应的漫游设备列表,之后,将各个接入点设备的设备标识以及对应的漫游设备列表,存储至设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中。这样,当第一接入点设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表时,可以根据第一接入点设备的标识,从存储的设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,并将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。Regarding the manner in which the first access point device actively obtains the roaming device list, the access control device can determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and then, the device identification of each access point device and the corresponding roaming device The list is stored in the correspondence between the device identification and the roaming device list. In this way, when the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device, it can compare the stored device identification with the identification of the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device. In the correspondence between the roaming device lists, the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is determined, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device.
当然,接入控制设备也可以对不同的接入点设备确定对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识后,接入控制设备可以将各个接入点设备的设备标识和对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。也即是,将各个接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,将各个接入点设备对应的第三接入点设备的标识作为第二设备标识,将各个接入点设备的设备标识和对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。这样,当第一接入点设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表时,可以将第一接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,从第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中,确定对应的一个或多个第二设备标识,进而将确定的一个或多个第二设备标识作为第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。然后,生成包括该一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识的漫游设备列表,将该漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。Of course, the access control device may also determine the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to different access point devices, and the access control device may associate the device identification of each access point device with the corresponding one. Or the identities of the multiple third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity. That is, the identifier of each access point device is used as the first device identifier, the identifier of the third access point device corresponding to each access point device is used as the second device identifier, and the device identifier of each access point device is combined with The identities of the corresponding one or more third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity. In this way, when the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the identity of the first access point device can be used as the first device identity, from In the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier, determine the corresponding one or more second device identifiers, and then use the determined one or more second device identifiers as one corresponding to the first access point device Or the identities of multiple third access point devices. Then, a roaming device list including the identities of the one or more third access point devices is generated, and the roaming device list is sent to the first access point device.
由于接入控制设备确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识之后,并未生成漫游设备列表下发给第一接入点设备,而是存储设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系,或者存储第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系。在第一接入点设备对某个 终端(比如目标终端)进行漫游引导,且接入控制设备接收到第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求时,接入控制设备可以按照上述方式确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,并将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备,这样在第一接入点设备对应的漫游引导列表更新的情况下,可以保证第一接入点设备能够获取到准确性较高的漫游设备列表。After the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device, it does not generate a roaming device list and send it to the first access point device, but instead stores the device identity and the identity of the third access point device. The corresponding relationship between the roaming device lists, or the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier is stored. When the first access point device conducts roaming guidance for a certain terminal (such as a target terminal), and the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, the access control device may determine the first A roaming device list corresponding to the access point device, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device, so that when the roaming guide list corresponding to the first access point device is updated It can ensure that the first access point device can obtain a list of roaming devices with higher accuracy.
可选地,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括一个或多个第三接入点设备,这样,第一接入点设备根据第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备时,可以根据该漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到一个或多个参考接入点设备。Optionally, the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices. In this way, the first access point device selects the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device from the one or more third access point devices. When determining a third access point device to be one or more reference access point devices among multiple third access point devices, the one or more third access point devices may be selected from the roaming device list according to the roaming device list. Select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition among the three to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
第二方面,提供了一种漫游引导方法,在该方法中,接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件。接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件,其中,第一接入点设备所关联的目标终端的款型为所述参考款型,第一接入点设备是指接入控制设备所控制的一个接入点设备。In a second aspect, a roaming guidance method is provided, in which an access control device determines a reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The access control device sends a reference roaming guide condition to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device refers to the access point device. An access point device controlled by the control device.
也即是,接入控制设备针对不同款型的终端确定不同的漫游引导条件,这样,在后续漫游引导时,就算不同款型的终端内置的漫游规则不同,在目标终端满足上述方法确定的参考漫游引导条件之后,对目标终端进行漫游引导时,可以提高漫游引导的成功率。That is, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. In this way, during subsequent roaming guidance, even if the built-in roaming rules of different types of terminals are different, the target terminal meets the reference determined by the above method. After roaming guidance conditions, when roaming guidance is performed on the target terminal, the success rate of roaming guidance can be improved.
可选地,接入控制设备可以通过多种方式向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件。接下来对其中的几种方式进行介绍。Optionally, the access control device may send the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device in multiple ways. Several of these methods are introduced next.
第一种方式,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。In the first manner, the access control device sends a first correspondence to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
第二种方式,接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识。接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件。In the second manner, the access control device receives the first guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the first guide condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal. The access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device. The access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device.
对于上述两种方式,第一接入点设备为了确定参考漫游引导条件,需要首先确定目标终端的款型标识。作为一种示例,接入控制设备可以获取目标终端的MAC地址,根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识。之后,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识,以使第一接入点设备根据目标终端的款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。For the above two methods, in order to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device needs to first determine the model identifier of the target terminal. As an example, the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal, and determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence is used to indicate access The model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the control device. After that, the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
可选地,接入控制设备获取目标终端的MAC地址的方式可以包括:接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;或者,接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址。Optionally, the manner in which the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal may include: the access control device receives a model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal; or, The access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
第三种方式,接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址。接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识。接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第 一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件。In the third manner, the access control device receives the second boot condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the second boot condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal. The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence is used to indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address identified by the access control device . The access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device . The access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device.
对于上述第三种方式中,接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识之前,还可以创建第二对应关系。也即是,接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型描述信息。接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型描述信息,确定目标终端的款型标识。接入控制设备将目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型标识,存储至第二对应关系中。For the third method described above, the access control device may also create a second correspondence before determining the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal. The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal. The access control device stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
可选地,在本申请中,接入控制设备还可以向第一接入点设备下发第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表。也即是,接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识。接入控制设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送漫游设备列表。Optionally, in this application, the access control device may also issue a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. That is, the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device. The access control device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device. The roaming device list includes the identities of one or more third access point devices, and one or more third access point devices. The access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device. The access control device sends a roaming device list to the first access point device.
可选地,接入控制设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表之前,还可以确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。也即是,接入控制设备获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备,漫游体验指示信息用于指示与第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质量是否改善。接入控制设备根据多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。接入控制设备按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。Optionally, before determining the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, the access control device may also determine one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device. The ID of the in-point device. That is, the access control device obtains multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the multiple historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality behind the device has improved. The access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device stores the identification of one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
基于上述描述,接入控制设备可以存储设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系,还可以存储第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系。所以,接入控制设备按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储该一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识的实现过程可以为:接入控制设备将第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识生成一个漫游设备列表,即第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,之后,接入控制设备可以将第一接入点设备的标识和第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,存储至设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中。或者,接入控制设备可以将第一接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,将第一接入点设备对应的第三接入点设备的标识作为第二设备标识,将第一接入点设备的标识和第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。Based on the foregoing description, the access control device may store the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list, and may also store the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. Therefore, the access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device. Or multiple third access point device identifiers to generate a roaming device list, that is, a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. After that, the access control device can combine the identifier of the first access point device with the first access point device. The roaming device list corresponding to the in-point device is stored in the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list. Alternatively, the access control device may use the identity of the first access point device as the first device identity, use the identity of the third access point device corresponding to the first access point device as the second device identity, and use the first access point device as the second device identity. The identification of the point device and the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device are stored in the correspondence between the first device identification and the second device identification.
可选地,接入控制设备根据该多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,可以按照强化学习的方式,确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。即,接入控制设备按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从该多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录。接入控制设备获取第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且该邻居接入点设备未包含在该多条历史漫游记录中。接入控制设备将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。Optionally, the access control device may determine one or more first access point devices corresponding to the first access point device according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. 3. The identification of the access point device. That is, the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device obtains the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records. The access control device determines the identification of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record and the acquired identification of the neighbor access point device as one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device The identification of the device.
需要说明的是,强化学习是AI算法中的一种,强化学习指的是面向目标的算法,这种学 习算法可以使确定的一个或多个第三接入点设备更趋于精准化。也即是,通过强化学习的方式确定的一个或多个第三接入点设备为从第一接入点设备漫游后的信号质量改善的接入点设备。另外,由于多个历史漫游记录包括之前漫游引导过的接入点设备,但是未进行漫游引导过的接入点设备也有可能是信号质量改善的接入点设备,所以,还可以将未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备作为第三接入点设备。It should be noted that reinforcement learning is a type of AI algorithm. Reinforcement learning refers to a goal-oriented algorithm. This learning algorithm can make the determined one or more third access point devices more accurate. That is, the one or more third access point devices determined by means of reinforcement learning are access point devices with improved signal quality after roaming from the first access point device. In addition, since multiple historical roaming records include access point devices that have been guided by roaming before, but the access point devices that have not been guided by roaming may also be access point devices with improved signal quality, so they can also be included in the The neighbor access point device of the multiple historical roaming records serves as the third access point device.
可选地,接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件,包括:接入控制设备确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备。接入控制设备按照多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定参考漫游引导条件。Optionally, the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, including: the access control device determines a combination of multiple access point devices, and each Multiple parameter combinations corresponding to the access point device combination, each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device, and the source access point device in the multiple access point device combination All are the first access point devices. According to multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, the access control device uses different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance for one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The test is to successfully guide one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam as the standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
也即是,接入控制设备确定多个接入点设备组合之后,不仅可以按照不同的信号强度来进行漫游引导测试,还可以结合信道、频段、接入点设备的负载等参数来进行漫游引导测试。也即是,接入点设备可以按照信号强度、信道、频段、接入点设备的负载等特征中的一种或多种,来进行多次漫游引导测试,进而确定参考漫游引导条件。That is, after the access control device determines the combination of multiple access point devices, it can not only perform roaming guidance tests according to different signal strengths, but also perform roaming guidance based on parameters such as channel, frequency band, and access point device load. test. That is, the access point device can perform multiple roaming guidance tests according to one or more of the characteristics of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load of the access point device to determine the reference roaming guidance condition.
可选地,该多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。Optionally, the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
第三方面,提供了一种漫游引导装置,所述漫游引导装置具有实现上述第一方面中漫游引导方法行为的功能。所述漫游引导装置包括一个或模块,该一个或多个模块用于实现上述第一方面所提供的漫游引导方法。In a third aspect, a roaming guidance device is provided, and the roaming guidance device has the function of realizing the behavior of the roaming guidance method in the first aspect. The roaming guide device includes one or a module, and the one or more modules are used to implement the roaming guide method provided in the first aspect.
也即是,该漫游引导装置包括:第一确定模块和第一发送模块。That is, the roaming guidance device includes: a first determining module and a first sending module.
第一确定模块,用于确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括第一接入点设备和/或第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,目标终端是指与第一接入点设备关联的一个终端;The first determining module is used to determine the signal strength of each second access point device in the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal to obtain one or more signal strengths, and one or more second access point devices. The access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device;
第一确定模块,还用于根据一个或多个信号强度确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module is further configured to determine that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition according to one or more signal strengths;
第一发送模块,用于在第一确定模块确定出目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,向目标终端发送漫游引导指令,漫游引导指令携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,漫游引导指令用于引导目标终端漫游到一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型是指目标终端的款型。The first sending module is configured to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal when the first determining module determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the roaming guidance instruction carries one or more reference access point device identifiers, and the roaming guidance instruction It is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, The reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二确定模块,用于确定目标终端的款型标识;The second determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal;
第三确定模块,用于根据款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。The third determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一接收模块,用于接收并存储接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件;The first receiving module is configured to receive and store the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device;
第三确定模块用于:The third determining module is used to:
根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。According to the model identifier of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the first corresponding relationship.
可选地,第三确定模块包括:Optionally, the third determining module includes:
第一发送子模块,用于向接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识;The first sending submodule is configured to send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
第一接收子模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first receiving sub-module is configured to receive the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in the target terminal according to the model identifier of the target terminal. The one-to-one correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each type identifier recognized by the access control device.
可选地,第二确定模块包括:Optionally, the second determining module includes:
获取子模块,用于从接入控制设备中获取目标终端的款型标识。The obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
可选地,获取子模块包括:Optionally, the obtaining submodule includes:
发送单元,用于向接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识;或者The sending unit is configured to send a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device ;or
接收单元,用于接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识,目标终端的款型标识为接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址之后,通过目标终端的MAC地址确定的。The receiving unit is configured to receive the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device. The model identifier of the target terminal is the access control device after obtaining the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and then through the target terminal The MAC address is determined.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二发送模块,用于向接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;The second sending module is configured to send a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
第二接收模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址确定目标终端的款型标识之后,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second receiving module is configured to receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device. The reference roaming guide condition is that after the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal, the first corresponding stored in itself Determined in the relationship, the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
获取模块,用于从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The obtaining module is used to obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list includes the identification of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are the first access point devices Neighbor access point equipment;
第四确定模块,用于根据漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设中,确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。The fourth determining module is configured to determine the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
可选地,该获取模块包括:Optionally, the acquisition module includes:
第二接收子模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表;或者The second receiving submodule is used to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device; or
第二发送子模块,用于向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识;第三接收子模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表。The second sending submodule is configured to send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the third receiving submodule is configured to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
可选地,该一个或多个第二接入点设备包括一个或多个第三接入点设备;Optionally, the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices;
第四确定模块包括:The fourth determining module includes:
选择子模块,用于根据漫游设备列表,从一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到一个或多个参考接入点设备。The selection submodule is used to select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
第四方面,提供了一种漫游引导装置,所述漫游引导装置具有实现上述第二方面中漫游引导方法行为的功能。所述漫游引导装置包括一个或模块,该一个或多个模块用于实现上述 第二方面所提供的漫游引导方法。In a fourth aspect, a roaming guidance device is provided, and the roaming guidance device has the function of realizing the behavior of the roaming guidance method in the second aspect. The roaming guidance device includes one or a module, and the one or more modules are used to implement the roaming guidance method provided in the above-mentioned second aspect.
也即是,该漫游引导装置包括:第一确定模块和第一发送模块。That is, the roaming guidance device includes: a first determining module and a first sending module.
第一确定模块,用于通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module is configured to determine the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
第一发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件,其中,第一接入点设备所关联的目标终端的款型为参考款型,第一接入点设备是指接入控制设备所控制的一个接入点设备。The first sending module is configured to send reference roaming guidance conditions to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device is the finger connection An access point device controlled by the access control device.
可选地,第一发送模块用于:Optionally, the first sending module is used to:
向第一接入点设备发送第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first correspondence is sent to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识;A first receiving module, configured to receive a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by a first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries a model identifier of the target terminal;
第二确定模块,用于根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device Guidance conditions.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一获取模块,用于获取目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址;The first obtaining module is used to obtain the media access control MAC address of the target terminal;
第三确定模块,用于根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;The third determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device. Model identification;
第二发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识,以使第一接入点设备根据目标终端的款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。The second sending module is configured to send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
可选地,第一获取模块包括:Optionally, the first obtaining module includes:
接收子模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;或者The receiving sub-module is configured to receive the model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal; or
获取子模块,用于从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址。The obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;The second receiving module is configured to receive a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
第四确定模块,用于根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The fourth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device. Model ID: According to the model ID of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the stored first correspondence. The first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model ID identified by the access control device .
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二获取模块,用于从目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型描述信息;The second acquiring module is configured to acquire the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
第五确定模块,用于根据目标终端的款型描述信息,确定目标终端的款型标识;The fifth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
第一存储模块,用于将目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型标识,存储至第二对应关系中。The first storage module is used to store the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第三接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识;The third receiving module is configured to receive a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
第六确定模块,用于根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The sixth determining module is configured to determine a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, one or more The third access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
第三发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送漫游设备列表。The third sending module is used to send the roaming device list to the first access point device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第三获取模块,用于获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备,漫游体验指示信息用于指示与第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质量是否改善;The third acquisition module is used to acquire multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved;
第七确定模块,用于根据多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识;The seventh determining module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
第二存储模块,用于按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The second storage module is configured to store the identities of one or more third access point devices according to the identities of the first access point devices.
可选地,第七确定模块包括:Optionally, the seventh determining module includes:
确定子模块,用于根据多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,按照强化学习的方式,确定一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The determining sub-module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
可选地,确定子模块用于:Optionally, determine the sub-module for:
按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录;According to the roaming experience instruction information corresponding to each historical roaming record, select historical roaming records with improved signal quality after roaming from multiple historical roaming records;
获取第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且邻居接入点设备未包含在多条历史漫游记录中;Acquiring the identifier of the neighboring access point device of the first access point device, and the neighboring access point device is not included in multiple historical roaming records;
将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record are determined as the identification of one or more third access point devices.
可选地,第一确定模块用于:Optionally, the first determining module is used to:
确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备;Determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination. Each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the access point device combination are all the first access point devices;
按照多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定参考漫游引导条件。According to multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, use different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to succeed One or more terminals belonging to the reference model are guided to roam as a standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
可选地,该多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。Optionally, the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
第五方面,提供了一种接入点设备,所述接入点设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器用于存储执行上述第一方面所提供的漫游引导方法的程序,以及存储用于实现上述第一方面所提供的漫游引导方法所涉及的数据。所述处理器被配置为用于执行所述存储器中存储的程 序。所述存储设备的操作装置还可以包括通信总线,该通信总线用于该处理器与存储器之间建立连接。In a fifth aspect, an access point device is provided. The access point device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory is configured to store a program for executing the roaming guidance method provided in the first aspect, and to store The data involved in the roaming guidance method provided in the first aspect described above. The processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory. The operating device of the storage device may further include a communication bus, and the communication bus is used to establish a connection between the processor and the memory.
第六方面,提供了一种接入控制设备,所述接入控制设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器用于存储执行上述第二方面所提供的漫游引导方法的程序,以及存储用于实现上述第二方面所提供的漫游引导方法所涉及的数据。所述处理器被配置为用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序。所述存储设备的操作装置还可以包括通信总线,该通信总线用于该处理器与存储器之间建立连接。In a sixth aspect, an access control device is provided. The access control device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory is configured to store a program for executing the roaming guidance method provided in the second aspect above, and to store The data involved in the roaming guidance method provided by the above second aspect. The processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory. The operating device of the storage device may further include a communication bus, and the communication bus is used to establish a connection between the processor and the memory.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面所述的漫游引导方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the first aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面所述的漫游引导方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the second aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面所述的漫游引导方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the first aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面所述的漫游引导方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the roaming guidance method described in the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了漫游引导系统,所述漫游引导系统包括:多个接入点设备、接入控制设备和目标终端,所述多个接入点设备包括第一接入点设备,所述第一接入点设备用于实现上述第一方面所述的方法的步骤,所述接入控制设备用于实现上述第二方面所述的方法的步骤。In an eleventh aspect, a roaming guidance system is provided. The roaming guidance system includes: a plurality of access point devices, an access control device, and a target terminal; the plurality of access point devices includes a first access point device; The first access point device is used to implement the steps of the method described in the first aspect, and the access control device is used to implement the steps of the method described in the second aspect.
上述第二方面至第十一方面所获得的技术效果与第一方面中对应的技术手段获得的技术效果近似,在这里不再赘述。The technical effects obtained from the second aspect to the eleventh aspect described above are similar to the technical effects obtained by the corresponding technical means in the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
本申请提供的技术方案至少可以带来以下有益效果:The technical solution provided in this application can at least bring about the following beneficial effects:
在本申请中,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以,参考漫游引导条件和目标终端内置的漫游规则相差不大。这样,在第一接入点设备获取到参考漫游引导条件,并确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,就算目标终端不是无条件地服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,但是也可以大概率地引导目标终端漫游成功。而且,接入控制设备针对不同款型的终端确定不同的漫游引导条件,就算不同款型的终端内置的漫游规则不同,按照上述方法进行漫游引导也可以提高漫游引导的成功率。In this application, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The reference model is the model of the target terminal, so refer to the roaming guidance condition It is not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游过程的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a roaming process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种实施环境的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation environment provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一种实施环境的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of another implementation environment provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种数据访问方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a data access method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游引导装置的结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一种漫游引导装置的结构示意图。Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施方式作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions, and advantages of the present application clearer, the implementation manners of the present application will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
为了便于理解,在对本申请实施例提供的漫游引导方法进行详细的解释说明之前,先对本申请实施例涉及的名词以及实施环境进行解释或者介绍。For ease of understanding, before detailed explanation of the roaming guidance method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terms and implementation environment involved in the embodiment of the present application will be explained or introduced.
首先对本申请实施例涉及的名词进行解释。First, the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application will be explained.
BSS:单个接入点设备提供的服务称为BSS。BSS: The service provided by a single access point device is called BSS.
ESS:多个接入点设备使用同一接入控制设备管理,并以相同的服务集标识(service set identifier,SSID)提供的统一服务称为ESS。也即是,一个ESS可以包括多个BSS。ESS: The unified service provided by multiple access point devices using the same access control device and provided with the same service set identifier (SSID) is called ESS. That is, one ESS can include multiple BSSs.
关联:终端与接入点设备建立通信连接的状态。终端与某一接入点设备关联,也即是该终端接入该接入点设备,进而可以访问该接入点设备,或者该接入点设备能够为终端提供服务。Association: The state in which the terminal establishes a communication connection with the access point device. The terminal is associated with a certain access point device, that is, the terminal accesses the access point device, and then can access the access point device, or the access point device can provide services for the terminal.
漫游:终端在同一个ESS中的不同BSS之间切换的过程称为漫游。其中,一个接入点设备对应一个BSS,一个ESS可以包括多个BSS。换句话说,终端从与一个接入点设备的关联切换到与另一个接入点设备的关联的过程称为漫游。Roaming: The process of a terminal switching between different BSSs in the same ESS is called roaming. Among them, one access point device corresponds to one BSS, and one ESS can include multiple BSSs. In other words, the process of the terminal switching from the association with one access point device to the association with another access point device is called roaming.
示例地,请参考图1,ESS包括两个BSS,一个BSS对应接入点设备1,另一个BSS对应接入点设备2。终端一开始在位置点A处与接入点设备1关联,当终端移动到位置点A’处,终端与接入点设备2关联。也即是,终端漫游前与接入点设备1关联,漫游后与接入点设备2关联。For example, please refer to FIG. 1. The ESS includes two BSSs, one BSS corresponds to the access point device 1, and the other BSS corresponds to the access point device 2. The terminal initially associates with the access point device 1 at the location point A, and when the terminal moves to the location point A', the terminal associates with the access point device 2. That is, the terminal associates with the access point device 1 before roaming, and associates with the access point device 2 after roaming.
终端:可移动的终端设备,也称移动终端。在WLAN中,终端还称为站点(station,STA)。示例地,本申请实施例中,该终端可以是笔记本电脑(也称个人电脑(Personal Computer,PC)),游戏控制台,平板电脑,智能手机,电子阅读器,数字广播终端,消息收发设备、个人数字助理或可穿戴设备等,该可穿戴设备可以为手环或手表等。Terminal: A mobile terminal device, also called a mobile terminal. In the WLAN, the terminal is also called a station (station, STA). For example, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal may be a notebook computer (also called a personal computer (PC)), a game console, a tablet computer, a smart phone, an e-reader, a digital broadcasting terminal, a messaging device, Personal digital assistant or wearable device, etc. The wearable device can be a bracelet or a watch.
信号强度:终端接收到的接入点设备发送的信号的强度,单位是dbm。信号强度一般为负值,数值越大表示信号质量越好。大多数场景中,-50及以上是信号质量非常好的,-70及以下认为是信号质量比较差。Signal strength: The strength of the signal sent by the access point device received by the terminal, in dbm. The signal strength is generally negative, and the larger the value, the better the signal quality. In most scenarios, -50 and above are considered to have very good signal quality, and -70 and below are considered to be poor.
接下来对本申请实施例涉及的实施环境进行介绍。Next, the implementation environment involved in the embodiments of the present application will be introduced.
请参考图2,图2是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游引导方法所涉及的一种实施环境的示意图。该实施环境所涉及的网络架构包括接入控制设备201、多个接入点设备202(图2中以3个接入点设备示意性表示该多个接入点设备)以及目标终端203。Please refer to FIG. 2, which is a schematic diagram of an implementation environment involved in a roaming guidance method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The network architecture involved in this implementation environment includes an access control device 201, multiple access point devices 202 (three access point devices schematically represent the multiple access point devices in FIG. 2), and a target terminal 203.
其中,接入控制设备201与该多个接入点设备202分别通过无线或者有线网络连接,以进行通信。目标终端203可以与该多个接入点设备202中的一个接入点设备通过无线或者有线网络连接,以进行通信。也即是,目标终端203可以与该多个接入点设备202中的一个接入点设备进行关联。Wherein, the access control device 201 and the multiple access point devices 202 are respectively connected through a wireless or wired network for communication. The target terminal 203 may be connected to one of the multiple access point devices 202 through a wireless or wired network to communicate. That is, the target terminal 203 can be associated with one of the multiple access point devices 202.
接入控制设备201可以管理该多个接入点设备202。比如,接入控制设备201可以统一为该多个接入点设备202下发配置、进行软件升级等,还可以按照时段控制处于工作状态的接入点设备的数量等等。与目标终端203关联的接入点设备可以为目标终端203提供服务。比如,目标终端203可以依次通过与目标终端203关联的接入点设备和接入控制设备201向其他设备发送数据报文,或者,也可以依次通过接入控制设备201和与目标终端203关联的接入点设备接收其他设备发送的数据报文等等。The access control device 201 can manage the multiple access point devices 202. For example, the access control device 201 can uniformly issue configurations and perform software upgrades for the multiple access point devices 202, and can also control the number of access point devices in a working state according to a time period, and so on. The access point device associated with the target terminal 203 can provide services for the target terminal 203. For example, the target terminal 203 may sequentially send data packets to other devices through the access point device associated with the target terminal 203 and the access control device 201, or it may sequentially use the access control device 201 and the access control device 201 associated with the target terminal 203 to send data packets. The access point device receives data messages sent by other devices and so on.
在本申请实施例中,接入控制设备201除了具有上述功能之外,还可以通过目标终端203的MAC地址确定目标终端203的款型标识、对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件、确定接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表等功能。其中,参考款型是指目标终端203的款型,属于参考款型的一个或多个终端可以包括目标终端203,且参考漫游引导条件也可以称为属于参考款型的一个或多个终端的终端画像。In the embodiment of the present application, in addition to the above-mentioned functions, the access control device 201 can also determine the model identifier of the target terminal 203 through the MAC address of the target terminal 203, and perform multiple operations on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The secondary guidance test determines functions such as reference roaming guidance conditions and determining the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device. Among them, the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal 203. One or more terminals belonging to the reference model can include the target terminal 203, and the reference roaming guidance condition can also be referred to as the model of one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. Terminal portrait.
接入点设备202除了具有上述功能之外,还可以对目标终端203进行漫游引导、与目标终端203交互信号强度等功能。In addition to the above-mentioned functions, the access point device 202 may also perform roaming guidance for the target terminal 203 and exchange signal strength with the target terminal 203 and other functions.
也即是,请参考图3,接入控制设备201可以包括终端识别模块、引导条件确定模块和漫游设备确定模块,接入点设备202可以包括漫游引导控制模块和终端交互模块。That is, referring to FIG. 3, the access control device 201 may include a terminal identification module, a guidance condition determination module, and a roaming device determination module, and the access point device 202 may include a roaming guidance control module and a terminal interaction module.
其中,终端识别模块用于从目标终端203发送的数据报文中识别目标终端203的MAC地址,进而通过目标终端203的MAC地址确定目标终端203的款型标识。引导条件确定模块用于对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件。漫游设备确定模块用于确定接入点设备202对应的漫游设备列表。可选地,漫游设备确定模块用于周期性地通过强化学习的方式确定接入点设备202对应的漫游设备列表。The terminal identification module is used to identify the MAC address of the target terminal 203 from the data message sent by the target terminal 203, and then determine the model identifier of the target terminal 203 through the MAC address of the target terminal 203. The guidance condition determination module is used to perform multiple guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to determine the reference roaming guidance condition. The roaming device determining module is used to determine the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device 202. Optionally, the roaming device determining module is configured to periodically determine the roaming device list corresponding to the access point device 202 by means of reinforcement learning.
漫游引导控制模块用于根据参考漫游引导条件,决定何时向目标终端203发送漫游引导指令,还用于根据接入控制设备201确定的漫游设备列表,确定向目标终端203推荐的漫游后能够关联的接入点设备。终端交互模块用于测量目标终端203接收到的信号强度。The roaming guidance control module is used to determine when to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal 203 according to the reference roaming guidance condition, and is also used to determine the roaming recommended to the target terminal 203 after it can be associated according to the roaming device list determined by the access control device 201 Access point device. The terminal interaction module is used to measure the signal strength received by the target terminal 203.
需要说明的是,该实施环境所涉及的网络可以是WLAN。该实施环境所涉及的网络架构可以部署在商场、超市、办公楼或停车场等多种区域中。It should be noted that the network involved in the implementation environment may be a WLAN. The network architecture involved in the implementation environment can be deployed in a variety of areas such as shopping malls, supermarkets, office buildings, or parking lots.
请参考图4,图4是根据本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图,该网络设备可以是图2中所示的接入控制设备201,也可以为接入点设备202。该网络设备可以包括一个或多个处理器401、通信总线402、存储器403以及一个或多个通信接口404。Please refer to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application. The network device may be the access control device 201 shown in FIG. 2 or the access point device 202. The network device may include one or more processors 401, a communication bus 402, a memory 403, and one or more communication interfaces 404.
处理器401可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、微处理器、或者可以是一个或多个用于实现本申请方案的集成电路,例如,专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 401 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a microprocessor, or may be one or more integrated circuits used to implement the solutions of the present application, for example , Application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (programmable logic device, PLD) or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof.
通信总线402用于在上述组件之间传送信息。通信总线402可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The communication bus 402 is used to transfer information between the above-mentioned components. The communication bus 402 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in the figure, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
存储器403可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM),也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、光盘(包括只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)、压缩光盘、激光盘、数字通用光盘、蓝光光盘等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备,或者是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质,但不限于此。存储器403可以是独立存在,并通过通信总线402与处理器401相连接。存储器403也可以和处理器401集成在一起。The memory 403 may be read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), or electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. , EEPROM), optical discs (including compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM), compact discs, laser discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or Any other medium used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and which can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this. The memory 403 may exist independently and is connected to the processor 401 through the communication bus 402. The memory 403 may also be integrated with the processor 401.
通信接口404使用任何收发器一类的装置,用于与其它设备或通信网络通信。通信接口404包括有线通信接口,还可以包括无线通信接口。其中,有线通信接口例如可以为以太网接口。以太网接口可以是光接口,电接口或其组合。无线通信接口可以为无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)接口,蜂窝网络通信接口或其组合等。The communication interface 404 uses any device such as a transceiver for communicating with other devices or a communication network. The communication interface 404 includes a wired communication interface, and may also include a wireless communication interface. Among them, the wired communication interface may be, for example, an Ethernet interface. The Ethernet interface can be an optical interface, an electrical interface, or a combination thereof. The wireless communication interface may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) interface, a cellular network communication interface, or a combination thereof.
在一些实施例中,网络设备可以包括多个处理器,如图4中所示的处理器401和处理器405。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器,也可以是一个多核处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In some embodiments, the network device may include multiple processors, such as the processor 401 and the processor 405 as shown in FIG. 4. Each of these processors can be a single-core processor or a multi-core processor. The processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (such as computer program instructions).
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,网络设备还可以包括输出设备406和输入设备407。输出设备406和处理器401通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备406可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备、阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备407和处理器401通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备407可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the network device may further include an output device 406 and an input device 407. The output device 406 communicates with the processor 401 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 406 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc. . The input device 407 communicates with the processor 401, and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 407 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
在一些实施例中,存储器403用于存储执行本申请方案的程序代码410,处理器401可以执行存储器403中存储的程序代码410。该程序代码中可以包括一个或多个软件模块,该网络设备可以通过处理器401以及存储器403中的程序代码410,来实现下文图5实施例提供的漫游引导方法。In some embodiments, the memory 403 is used to store the program code 410 for executing the solution of the present application, and the processor 401 may execute the program code 410 stored in the memory 403. The program code may include one or more software modules, and the network device may implement the roaming guidance method provided in the embodiment of FIG. 5 below through the processor 401 and the program code 410 in the memory 403.
对本申请实施例涉及的名词以及实施环境进行解释之后,接下来对本申请实施例提供的漫游引导方法进行详细解释说明。请参考图5,图5是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游引导方法的流程图。该方法包括如下步骤。After explaining the terms and implementation environment involved in the embodiments of the present application, the roaming guidance method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be explained in detail below. Please refer to FIG. 5, which is a flowchart of a roaming guidance method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method includes the following steps.
步骤501:第一接入点设备确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括第一接入点设备和/或第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,目标终端是指与第一接入点设备关联的一个终端。Step 501: The first access point device determines the signal strength of each of the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, and obtains one or more signal strengths, one or more The second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device.
在一些实施例中,第一接入点设备可以向目标终端发送强度获取请求。目标终端接收到强度获取请求之后,可以确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,从而得到一个或多个信号强度,进而将一个或多个信号强度发送给第一接入点设备。In some embodiments, the first access point device may send a strength acquisition request to the target terminal. After the target terminal receives the strength acquisition request, it can determine the signal strength of each of the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, thereby obtaining one or more signal strengths, and then One or more signal strengths are sent to the first access point device.
需要说明的是,接入点设备通常会周期性地广播信标帧,因此,目标终端可以确定接收到该一个或多个第二接入点设备广播的信标帧的信号强度,从而将接收到该一个或多个第二接入点设备广播的信标帧的信号强度,确定为该一个或多个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,也即是,上述的一个或多个信号强度。It should be noted that the access point device usually broadcasts beacon frames periodically. Therefore, the target terminal can determine the signal strength of the beacon frames broadcast by the one or more second access point devices, so as to receive The signal strength of the beacon frame broadcast to the one or more second access point devices is determined to be the signal strength when the one or more second access point devices communicate with the target terminal, that is, the above one Or multiple signal strengths.
当然,通过信标帧来确定信号强度只是一种示例。由于接入点设备通常是具有射频功能的,所以,目标终端也可以通过一个或多个第二接入点设备发射的其他射频信号,来确定该一个或多个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度。Of course, determining the signal strength through the beacon frame is just an example. Since the access point device usually has radio frequency functions, the target terminal can also determine the one or more second access point devices and the target through other radio frequency signals transmitted by one or more second access point devices. The signal strength of the terminal during communication.
在另一些实施例中,第一接入点设备可以通知一个或多个第二接入点设备,由一个或多个第二接入点设备来确定其与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,进而由相应的第二接入点设备将确定的信号强度发送给第一接入点设备。In other embodiments, the first access point device may notify one or more second access point devices, and the one or more second access point devices determine the signal strength when communicating with the target terminal, and obtain One or more signal strengths, and then the corresponding second access point device sends the determined signal strength to the first access point device.
需要说明的是,为了实现目标终端与接入点设备的关联,目标终端通常也是具有射频功能的,所以,一个或多个第二接入点设备可以通过目标终端发射的射频信号,来确定目标终端与自身进行通信时的信号强度。It should be noted that in order to achieve the association between the target terminal and the access point device, the target terminal usually also has radio frequency functions. Therefore, one or more second access point devices can determine the target through the radio frequency signal transmitted by the target terminal. The signal strength when the terminal communicates with itself.
由于不同款型的终端对应的漫游引导条件不同,比如,常见的一些漫游引导条件为:关联接入点设备的信号强度低于某个数值1、邻居接入点设备的信号强度大于某个数值2、或者邻居接入点设备的信号强度减去关联接入点设备的信号强度的数值大于某个数值3等等。在漫游引导条件不同时,一个或多个第二接入点设备也会不同。比如,漫游引导条件为:关联接入点设备的信号强度低于某个数值1,一个或多个第二接入点设备可以为第一接入点设备。漫游引导条件为:邻居接入点设备的信号强度大于某个数值2,一个或多个第二接入点设备可以为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。漫游引导条件为:邻居接入点设备的信号强度减去关联接入点设备的信号强度的数值大于某个数值3,一个或多个第二接入点设备可以为第一接入点设备以及第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。Because different types of terminals correspond to different roaming guidance conditions, for example, some common roaming guidance conditions are: the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2. Or the value of the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value of 3, and so on. When the roaming guidance conditions are different, one or more second access point devices will also be different. For example, the roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, and one or more second access point devices may be the first access point devices. The roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2, and one or more second access point devices may be neighboring access point devices of the first access point device. The roaming guidance condition is: the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value 3, one or more second access point devices can be the first access point device and The neighbor access point device of the first access point device.
所以,第一接入点设备在确定一个或多个信号强度之前,可以根据参考漫游引导条件,确定一个或多个第二接入点设备到底是第一接入点设备、还是第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,又或者是第一接入点设备和第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。Therefore, before the first access point device determines one or more signal strengths, it can determine whether one or more second access point devices are the first access point device or the first access point according to the reference roaming guide conditions. The neighbor access point device of the point device, or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device and the first access point device.
当然,按照参考漫游引导条件确定一个或多个第二接入点设备只是一种实现方式,第一接入点设备也可以直接将第一接入点设备和第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备确定为一个或多个第二接入点设备,从而确定一个或多个信号强度,后续按照参考漫游引导条件来选取对应的信号强度。Of course, determining one or more second access point devices according to the reference roaming guidance condition is only an implementation method, and the first access point device can also directly connect the first access point device with the neighbors of the first access point device. The in-point device is determined to be one or more second access point devices, so that one or more signal strengths are determined, and then the corresponding signal strength is selected according to the reference roaming guide condition.
在本申请实施例中,上述所述的第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备可以为第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表中包括的一个或多个第三接入点设备。其中,关于第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表将在后续进行详细介绍,此处不作过多解释。In the embodiment of the present application, the aforementioned neighboring access point device of the first access point device may be one or more third access point devices included in the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. Among them, the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device will be described in detail later, and there will be no more explanation here.
步骤502:第一接入点设备确定参考漫游引导条件,该参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型是指目标终端的款型。Step 502: The first access point device determines a reference roaming guidance condition. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. The reference model is Refers to the model of the target terminal.
在一些实施例中,第一接入点设备可以确定目标终端的款型标识,根据目标终端的款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。其中,第一接入点设备可以按照主动的方式或者被动的方式,根据目标终端的款型标识从接入控制设备中获取参考漫游引导条件。接下来,通过下述两种方式对第一接入点设备确定参考漫游引导条件的完整方式进行介绍。In some embodiments, the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal. The first access point device may obtain the reference roaming guidance condition from the access control device according to the model identifier of the target terminal in an active manner or a passive manner. Next, the following two methods are used to introduce a complete method for the first access point device to determine the reference roaming guide condition.
第一种方式、第一接入点设备接收并存储接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。这样,第一接入点设备可以直接确定目标终端的款型标识,进而根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。In the first way, the first access point device receives and stores the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device. In this way, the first access point device can directly determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
也即是,在第一种方式中,接入控制设备确定得到第一对应关系之后,可以主动将第一对应关系发送给第一接入点设备。之后,当第一接入点设备需要确定参考漫游引导条件时,可以先确定目标终端的款型标识,进而按照目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件。这样,在漫游引导的过程中,无需第一接入点设备再与接入控制设备来交互获取参考漫游引导条件,而是直接按照目标终端的款型标识,从本地存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,减少了第一接入点设备与接入控制设备之间的交互次数,从而节省了开销。That is, in the first manner, after determining that the access control device obtains the first correspondence relationship, it may actively send the first correspondence relationship to the first access point device. Later, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, it may first determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal. In this way, during the roaming guidance process, there is no need for the first access point device to interact with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions, but to directly follow the model identifier of the target terminal from the first correspondence stored locally Determining the reference roaming guide condition reduces the number of interactions between the first access point device and the access control device, thereby saving overhead.
基于上述描述,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件,也即是,不同的款型标识可能对应不同的漫游引导条件。而且,漫游引导条件可以包括两部分,一部分为漫游引导规则,另一部分为引导阈值。另外,由于一个款型可以包括多个终端,或者说多个不同的终端可以属于同一款型,因此,以属于参考款型的一个或多个终端为例,接入控制设备可以确定多个接入点设备组合,一个接入点设备组合中包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,该多个接入点设备组合包括的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备,且一个接入点设备组合可以对应多个不同信号强度组合,一个信号强度组合中包括相应源接入点设备的信号强度和相应目的接入点设备的信号强度。通过这多个接入点设备组合以及每个接入点设备组合对应的信号强度组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导这类终端漫游为标准,从而确定参考漫游引导条件。之后,接入控制设备可以将参考款型的款型标识和对应的漫游引导条件添加至第一对应关系中。Based on the foregoing description, the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device, that is, different model identifiers may correspond to different roaming guidance conditions. Moreover, the roaming guidance condition may include two parts, one part is the roaming guidance rule, and the other part is the guidance threshold. In addition, since one model can include multiple terminals, or multiple different terminals can belong to the same model, taking one or more terminals belonging to the reference model as an example, the access control device can determine multiple access terminals. Access point device combination, an access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device, and the source access point devices included in the multiple access point device combinations are all the first access point devices Point devices, and an access point device combination can correspond to multiple different signal strength combinations. A signal strength combination includes the signal strength of the corresponding source access point device and the signal strength of the corresponding destination access point device. Through these multiple access point device combinations and the signal strength combination corresponding to each access point device combination, use different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to successfully guide This type of terminal roaming is the standard, so as to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions. After that, the access control device may add the model identifier of the reference model and the corresponding roaming guidance condition to the first correspondence.
需要说明的是,由于漫游引导条件不仅包括漫游引导规则,还包括引导阈值。因此,接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,不仅可以确定属于参考款型的一个或多个终端遵循的漫游引导规则,还可以确定引导阈值。It should be noted that the roaming guidance conditions include not only roaming guidance rules, but also guidance thresholds. Therefore, the access control device performs multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, not only can determine the roaming guidance rules followed by one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, but also the guidance threshold.
比如,第一接入点设备接收并存储接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系可以如下述表1所示。假设第一接入点设备确定的目标终端的款型标识为146,那么,第一接入点设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从下述表1中可以确定出参考漫游引导条件中的漫游引导规则为规则R3,引导阈值为10。For example, the first access point device receiving and storing the first correspondence sent by the access control device may be as shown in Table 1 below. Assuming that the model identifier of the target terminal determined by the first access point device is 146, then the first access point device can determine the roaming in the reference roaming guidance condition from the following table 1 according to the model identifier of the target terminal The guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020142262-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020142262-appb-000001
需要说明的是,上述表1中的规则R1可以是指关联接入点设备的信号强度低于某个数值1,且数值1可以为对应的引导阈值-75。上述表1中的规则R2可以是指邻居接入点设备 的信号强度大于某个数值2,且数值2可以为对应的引导阈值-60。上述表1中的规则R3可以是指邻居接入点设备的信号强度减去关联接入点设备的信号强度的数值大于某个数值3,且数值3可以为对应的引导阈值10。当然,这只是一种示例,在其他一些实施例中,上述的规则R1、R2、R3还可以指代其他的规则。It should be noted that the rule R1 in the foregoing Table 1 may mean that the signal strength of the associated access point device is lower than a certain value 1, and the value 1 may be the corresponding guiding threshold -75. The rule R2 in Table 1 above may mean that the signal strength of the neighboring access point device is greater than a certain value 2, and the value 2 may be the corresponding guiding threshold -60. The rule R3 in Table 1 above may mean that the value of the signal strength of the neighboring access point device minus the signal strength of the associated access point device is greater than a certain value 3, and the value 3 may be the corresponding guide threshold value 10. Of course, this is just an example. In some other embodiments, the above-mentioned rules R1, R2, and R3 may also refer to other rules.
另外,按照上述描述,漫游引导条件包括漫游引导规则和引导阈值,且接入控制设备可以确定多个接入点设备组合以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个信号强度组合,进而对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,来确定参考漫游引导条件。虽然按照信号强度来确定漫游引导条件是最简单有效的方式,但是在其他一些实施例中,也可以结合其他的特征来确定漫游引导条件。比如,信道、频段(2.4G、5G)、接入点设备的负载,这些特征会影响引导阈值的大小。In addition, according to the above description, roaming guidance conditions include roaming guidance rules and guidance thresholds, and the access control device can determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple signal strength combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and then determine the One or more terminals of the reference model perform multiple roaming guidance tests to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions. Although it is the simplest and most effective way to determine the roaming guidance condition according to the signal strength, in some other embodiments, other features can also be combined to determine the roaming guidance condition. For example, the channel, frequency band (2.4G, 5G), and the load of the access point device, these characteristics will affect the size of the boot threshold.
以信道为例,在不同的信道,引导阈值不同。比如,在36信道,漫游引导规则为规则R3,引导阈值是10;在149信道,漫游引导规则仍然是规则R3,但是引导阈值变成了8。Take the channel as an example. Different channels have different guiding thresholds. For example, on channel 36, the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10; on channel 149, the roaming guidance rule is still rule R3, but the guidance threshold is changed to 8.
以频段为例,通常一个接入点设备一般同时存在2.4G频段和5G频段。这样漫游场景就分成四种情况,分别为:2.4G漫游到5G,5G漫游到2.4G,2.4G漫游到2.4G,5G漫游到5G。因为大部分终端支持优先接入5G频段,所以这四种场景一般会对引导阈值有影响。比如,对于2.4G漫游到2.4G、以及5G漫游到5G这两种场景,漫游引导规则为规则R3,引导阈值是10;对于2.4G漫游到5G的这种场景,漫游引导规则为规则R3,引导阈值是8;对于5G漫游到2.4G的这种场景,漫游引导规则为规则R3,引导阈值是12。Taking frequency bands as an example, usually a 2.4G frequency band and a 5G frequency band exist at the same time for an access point device. In this way, roaming scenarios are divided into four situations, namely: 2.4G roaming to 5G, 5G roaming to 2.4G, 2.4G roaming to 2.4G, and 5G roaming to 5G. Because most terminals support preferential access to the 5G frequency band, these four scenarios generally have an impact on the guidance threshold. For example, for the two scenarios of 2.4G roaming to 2.4G and 5G roaming to 5G, the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, and the guidance threshold is 10; for the scenario of 2.4G roaming to 5G, the roaming guidance rule is rule R3, The guide threshold is 8; for this scenario where 5G roams to 2.4G, the roaming guide rule is rule R3, and the guide threshold is 12.
以负载为例,在一些情况下,终端优先选择漫游到负载轻的接入点设备。这种情况,可能会对引导阈值有影响。Taking load as an example, in some cases, the terminal preferentially chooses to roam to an access point device with a light load. In this case, the boot threshold may be affected.
所以,接入控制设备确定多个接入点设备组合之后,不仅可以按照不同的信号强度来进行漫游引导测试,还可以结合信道、频段、接入点设备的负载等参数来进行漫游引导测试。也即是,接入点设备可以按照信号强度、信道、频段、接入点设备的负载等特征中的一种或多种,来进行多次漫游引导测试,进而确定参考漫游引导条件。Therefore, after the access control device determines the combination of multiple access point devices, it can not only perform roaming guidance tests according to different signal strengths, but also perform roaming guidance tests based on parameters such as channels, frequency bands, and access point device loads. That is, the access point device can perform multiple roaming guidance tests according to one or more of the characteristics of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load of the access point device to determine the reference roaming guidance condition.
换句话说,接入控制设备可以确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,该多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备。接入控制设备按照该多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定参考漫游引导条件。In other words, the access control device can determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and each access point device combination includes the identity and purpose of the source access point device. The identifier of the access point device, and the source access point devices in the multiple access point device combinations are all the first access point devices. According to the multiple access point device combinations and the multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, the access control device uses different pilot test conditions to roam one or more terminals belonging to the reference model multiple times The guidance test is to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions based on the successful guidance of one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam.
其中,该多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,该一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。Wherein, the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
在一些实施例中,接入控制设备按照上述方法对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试之后,可以选取成功引导这类终端漫游的引导测试条件,对选取的引导测试条件进行处理,得到参考漫游引导条件。其中,当选取的引导测试条件都相同的情况下,可以直接将选取的引导测试条件作为参考漫游引导条件。在选取的引导测试条件不同的情况下,比如,引导测试规则不完全相同,和/或,引导测试阈值不完全相同的情况下,可以对选取的引导测试条件进行处理,得到参考漫游引导条件。In some embodiments, after the access control device performs multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model according to the above-mentioned method, it can select the guidance test conditions for successfully guiding this type of terminal to roam, and test the selected guidance. The conditions are processed, and the reference roaming guidance conditions are obtained. Among them, when the selected guide test conditions are all the same, the selected guide test conditions can be directly used as the reference roaming guide conditions. In the case where the selected guided test conditions are different, for example, the guided test rules are not completely the same, and/or the guided test thresholds are not completely the same, the selected guided test conditions can be processed to obtain the reference roaming guide conditions.
需要说明的是,在不同的场景下,可以采用不同的处理方式对选取的引导测试条件进行 处理。比如,在一些实施例中,可以确定选取的引导测试条件中的引导测试规则和对应的引导测试阈值,确定每个引导测试规则的出现频率,确定出现频率最大的引导测试规则对应的引导测试阈值的平均值,将出现频率最大的引导测试规则作为参考漫游引导条件中的漫游引导规则,将出现频率最大的引导测试规则对应的引导测试阈值的平均值作为参考漫游引导条件中的引导阈值。It should be noted that in different scenarios, different processing methods can be used to process the selected guided test conditions. For example, in some embodiments, the guided test rules and the corresponding guided test thresholds in the selected guided test conditions can be determined, the frequency of each guided test rule can be determined, and the guided test threshold corresponding to the guided test rule with the highest frequency of occurrence can be determined. The guide test rule with the most frequent occurrence is used as the roaming guide rule in the reference roaming guide condition, and the average of the guide test thresholds corresponding to the guide test rule with the most frequent occurrence is used as the guide threshold in the reference roaming guide condition.
在本申请实施例中,第一接入点设备可以通过多种方式来确定目标终端的款型标识。但是在一些实施例中,款型标识是接入控制设备确定的,也即是,第一接入点设备想要获知目标终端的款型标识,需要从接入控制设备中来获取。换句话说,第一接入点设备可以从接入控制设备中获取目标终端的款型标识。接下来对这种情况下,第一接入点设备确定目标终端的款型标识的两种方式进行介绍。In the embodiment of the present application, the first access point device may determine the model identifier of the target terminal in a variety of ways. However, in some embodiments, the model identifier is determined by the access control device, that is, if the first access point device wants to learn the model identifier of the target terminal, it needs to obtain it from the access control device. In other words, the first access point device can obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device. Next, in this case, two ways for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal will be introduced.
(1)第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,该款型查询请求携带目标终端的MAC地址。接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识。之后,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识。(1) The first access point device sends a model query request to the access control device, and the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal. The access control device receives the model query request sent by the first access point device, and determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence is used to indicate the access The model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the access control device. After that, the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
也即是,在方式(1)中,接入控制设备中事先存储有第二对应关系,当第一接入点设备需要确定目标终端的款型标识时,第一接入点设备可以向接入控制设备发送款型查询请求。这样,接入控制设备可以根据目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中确定目标终端的款型标识,进而将目标终端的款型标识发送给第一接入点设备。这样就无需接入控制设备事先将第二对应关系下发给第一接入点设备,而且在接入控制设备对目标终端的款型标识进行更新的情况下,还可以保证第一接入点设备能够及时获取到准确性较高的款型标识。That is, in the method (1), the second corresponding relationship is stored in the access control device in advance, and when the first access point device needs to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, the first access point device can communicate with the access point device. The access control device sends a model query request. In this way, the access control device can determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device. In this way, there is no need for the access control device to issue the second correspondence to the first access point device in advance, and when the access control device updates the model identifier of the target terminal, it can also ensure that the first access point The equipment can obtain the more accurate model identification in time.
基于前文描述,与接入控制设备管理的接入点设备关联的终端发送给其他设备的数据报文都会经过接入控制设备,因此,接入控制设备可以按照终端发送的数据报文来确定终端的MAC地址,进而确定终端的款型标识,从而根据终端的MAC地址和款型标识创建第二对应关系。以目标终端为例,接入控制设备可以从目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型描述信息。接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型描述信息,确定目标终端的款型标识,将目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型标识,存储至第二对应关系中。Based on the foregoing description, data packets sent to other devices by terminals associated with the access point device managed by the access control device will all pass through the access control device. Therefore, the access control device can determine the terminal according to the data packet sent by the terminal. The MAC address of the terminal is further determined to determine the model identifier of the terminal, so as to create a second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the terminal and the model identifier. Taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may obtain the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal. The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
通常情况下,目标终端发送的数据报文中会携带自身的MAC地址,以及款型描述信息。示例地,当目标终端发送的数据报文为http报文时,http报文中可以携带目标终端的MAC地址,且http报文的user-agent字段中可以携带目标终端的款型描述信息。因此,接入控制设备可以从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址和款型描述信息。示例地,款型描述信息可以为huawei P30、iphone 8等等这些。Normally, the data message sent by the target terminal will carry its own MAC address and model description information. For example, when the data message sent by the target terminal is an http message, the http message may carry the MAC address of the target terminal, and the user-agent field of the http message may carry the model description information of the target terminal. Therefore, the access control device can obtain the MAC address and model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal. For example, the model description information can be huawei P30, iphone 8, and so on.
另外,由于不同款型终端的款型描述信息不同,因此,接入控制设备可以按照款型描述信息的不同,来区分不同的款型终端。也即是,以目标终端为例,接入控制设备可以直接将目标终端的款型描述信息作为目标终端的款型标识。当然,接入控制设备也可以按照目标终端的款型描述信息,来区分目标终端的款型,进而为目标终端分配对应的款型标识。In addition, because different models of terminals have different model description information, the access control device can distinguish different models of terminals according to the different model description information. That is, taking the target terminal as an example, the access control device may directly use the model description information of the target terminal as the model identifier of the target terminal. Of course, the access control device can also distinguish the model type of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal, and then assign a corresponding model identifier to the target terminal.
比如,接入控制设备存储的第二对应关系如下述表2所示,且表2中的款型标识为接入控制设备按照终端的款型描述信息为终端分配的款型标识。第一接入点设备向接入控制设备 发送款型查询请求之后,假设,该款型查询请求携带的目标终端的MAC地址为00:11:22:33:44:55。此时,接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址,从下述表2所示的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识为146。之后,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识。For example, the second correspondence stored by the access control device is shown in Table 2 below, and the model identifier in Table 2 is the model identifier assigned by the access control device to the terminal according to the model description information of the terminal. After the first access point device sends the model query request to the access control device, it is assumed that the MAC address of the target terminal carried in the model query request is 00:11:22:33:44:55. At this time, the access control device determines that the model identifier of the target terminal is 146 from the second correspondence shown in Table 2 below according to the MAC address of the target terminal. After that, the access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
表2Table 2
MAC地址MAC address 款型标识Style logo
00:11:22:33:44:5500:11:22:33:44:55 146146
33:44:55:DD:CC:FF33:44:55:DD:CC:FF 8282
............ ............
(2)接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址,根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,并向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识。之后,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识。(2) The access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and determines the target terminal's model identifier from the stored second correspondence according to the target terminal's MAC address, and sends it to the first An access point device sends the model identifier of the target terminal. After that, the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device.
也即是,方式(2)中,在接入控制设备接收到目标终端发送的数据报文之后,可以直接从数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址,然后根据目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识之后,直接发送给第一接入点设备。换句话说,接入控制设备可以主动确定目标终端的款型标识并下发给第一接入点设备,这样就无需第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导时再向接入控制设备来请求目标终端的款型标识,从而可以减少第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导的过程中与接入控制设备的交互,从而可以提高漫游引导的效率。That is, in method (2), after the access control device receives the data message sent by the target terminal, it can directly obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message, and then obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the first data message according to the MAC address of the target terminal. In the second correspondence, after the model identifier of the target terminal is determined, it is directly sent to the first access point device. In other words, the access control device can actively determine the model identifier of the target terminal and issue it to the first access point device, so that it is not necessary for the first access point device to guide the target terminal to the access control device when roaming. To request the model identifier of the target terminal, which can reduce the interaction between the first access point device and the access control device during roaming guidance of the target terminal, thereby improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
第二种方式、第一接入点设备可以直接确定目标终端的款型标识,向接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识。接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,并向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件。从而第一接入点设备可以接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件。In the second way, the first access point device may directly determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal. The access control device receives the first guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, determines the reference roaming guide condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and sends it to the first access point device Send reference roaming guidance conditions. Therefore, the first access point device can receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
也即是,在第二种方式中,接入控制设备确定第一对应关系之后,并未向第一接入点设备下发第一对应关系。而是在第一接入点设备需要确定参考漫游引导条件时,由第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送携带目标终端的款型标识的第一引导条件获取请求,进而由接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件后,发送给第一接入点设备。这样,在参考漫游引导条件更新后,可以保证第一接入点设备能够及时获取到准确性较高的参考漫游引导条件。That is, in the second manner, after the access control device determines the first correspondence, it does not deliver the first correspondence to the first access point device. Instead, when the first access point device needs to determine the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends the first guidance condition acquisition request carrying the model identifier of the target terminal to the access control device, and then the access control The device determines the reference roaming guide condition from the first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and then sends it to the first access point device. In this way, after the reference roaming guidance condition is updated, it can be ensured that the first access point device can obtain the reference roaming guidance condition with higher accuracy in time.
可选地,对于第二种方式,当第一接入点设备历史对其他终端进行漫游引导的过程中,从接入控制设备中获取到对应的漫游引导条件之后,第一接入点设备可以本地存储该终端的款型标识和对应的漫游引导条件的对应关系。这样,在第一接入点设备确定目标终端的款型标识之后,第一接入点设备可以先根据目标终端的款型标识,查询本地是否存储有参考漫游引导条件。如果第一接入点设备的本地未存储参考漫游引导条件,那么第一接入点设备可以向接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,进而由接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件后,发送给第一接入点设备。如果第一接入点设备 的本地存储有参考漫游引导条件,那么第一接入点设备就无需与接入控制设备进行交互,从而可以减少交互次数,提高漫游引导的效率。Optionally, for the second method, after the first access point device has obtained the corresponding roaming guidance conditions from the access control device during the roaming guidance process for other terminals in the history, the first access point device may The corresponding relationship between the model identifier of the terminal and the corresponding roaming guidance condition is stored locally. In this way, after the first access point device determines the model identifier of the target terminal, the first access point device may first query whether the reference roaming guide condition is stored locally according to the model identifier of the target terminal. If the reference roaming guide condition is not stored locally in the first access point device, the first access point device can send a first guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the access control device can then use the target terminal's model identification After determining the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence, send it to the first access point device. If the reference roaming guidance condition is stored locally in the first access point device, the first access point device does not need to interact with the access control device, thereby reducing the number of interactions and improving the efficiency of roaming guidance.
其中,第二种方式中,第一接入点设备确定目标终端的款型标识的方法可以参考上述第一种方式中的方法,本申请实施例对此不再赘述。Among them, in the second manner, the method for the first access point device to determine the model identifier of the target terminal may refer to the method in the first manner described above, which is not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,上述第二种方式不仅可以用来在目标终端进行漫游引导时获取参考漫游引导条件,还可以用来更新第一接入点设备本地存储的参考漫游引导条件。也即是,在接入控制设备更新第一对应关系中参考漫游引导条件之后,第一接入点设备还可以按照上述第二种方式从接入控制设备中获取更新后的漫游引导条件。It should be noted that the above-mentioned second method can not only be used to obtain the reference roaming guidance condition when the target terminal performs roaming guidance, but also can be used to update the reference roaming guidance condition stored locally in the first access point device. That is, after the access control device updates the first correspondence relationship with reference to the roaming guide condition, the first access point device may also obtain the updated roaming guide condition from the access control device in the second manner described above.
在本申请实施例中,第一接入点设备不仅可以按照上述两种方式,通过目标终端的款型标识来确定参考漫游引导条件,在另一些实施例中,第一接入点设备还可以通过其他的方式来确定参考漫游引导条件。比如,第一接入点设备可以按照目标终端的MAC地址来确定参考漫游引导条件。也即是,第一接入点设备可以确定目标终端的MAC地址,然后根据目标终端的MAC地址,从接入控制设备中确定参考漫游引导条件。接下来,通过下述第三种方式,对此进行详细解释说明。In the embodiments of the present application, the first access point device may not only determine the reference roaming guidance condition through the model identifier of the target terminal according to the above two methods, in other embodiments, the first access point device may also Determine the reference roaming guidance conditions by other means. For example, the first access point device may determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the MAC address of the target terminal. That is, the first access point device may determine the MAC address of the target terminal, and then determine the reference roaming guide condition from the access control device according to the MAC address of the target terminal. Next, this will be explained in detail through the following third method.
第三种方式、第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址。接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识。之后,接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件,并向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件。第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件。In the third manner, the first access point device sends a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, and the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal. The access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence is used for Indicate the model identifier corresponding to each MAC address recognized by the access control device. After that, the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device. The first access point device receives the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device.
也即是,在第三种方式中,第一接入点设备无需确定目标终端的款型标识,可以直接向接入控制设备发送携带有目标终端的MAC地址的第二引导条件获取请求。在接入控制设备接收到第二引导条件获取请求之后,按照目标终端的MAC地址,从第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,然后按照目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。换句话说,第三种方式中,第一接入点设备与接入控制设备进行一次交互,就可以获取到参考漫游引导条件,而无需先与接入控制设备进行一次交互来确定参考款型标识,再通过款型标识与接入控制设备进行二次交互来获取参考漫游引导条件。也即减少了与接入控制设备的交互次数,从而节省了开销。That is, in the third method, the first access point device does not need to determine the model identifier of the target terminal, and may directly send the second guide condition acquisition request carrying the MAC address of the target terminal to the access control device. After the access control device receives the second guide condition acquisition request, it determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and then according to the model identifier of the target terminal, from the first corresponding In the relationship, determine the reference roaming guidance conditions. In other words, in the third method, the first access point device interacts with the access control device once to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions without first interacting with the access control device to determine the reference model. Identification, and then use the model identification to perform a secondary interaction with the access control device to obtain the reference roaming guidance conditions. That is, the number of interactions with the access control device is reduced, thereby saving overhead.
步骤503:如果根据该一个或多个信号强度确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件,则第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令,漫游引导指令携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,漫游引导指令用于引导目标终端漫游到一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个。Step 503: If it is determined based on the one or more signal strengths that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, and the roaming guidance instruction carries the information of one or more reference access point devices. Identification, the roaming guidance instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of the one or more reference access point devices.
在通过步骤501确定一个或多个信号强度,以及通过步骤502确定参考漫游引导条件之后,第一接入点设备可以根据该一个或多个信号强度判断目标终端是否满足参考漫游引导条件。如果目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件,那么第一接入点设备可以向目标终端发送漫游引导指令。After determining one or more signal strengths in step 501 and determining the reference roaming guidance condition in step 502, the first access point device may determine whether the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition according to the one or more signal strengths. If the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device may send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal.
由于参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试后确定的,且参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以参考漫游引导条件与目标终端中内置的漫游规则相差不大,这样,在目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件的情况下,向目标终 端发送漫游引导指令,可以大概率地保证目标终端的漫游引导成功。换句话说,参考漫游引导条件能够大概率地保证目标终端的漫游引导成功。Since the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device through multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal, refer to the roaming guidance condition and target The built-in roaming rules in the terminal are not much different. In this way, when the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, sending a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal can guarantee the success of the roaming guidance of the target terminal with a high probability. In other words, referring to the roaming guidance conditions can guarantee the success of the roaming guidance of the target terminal with a high probability.
在本申请实施例中,第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,可以确定一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。作为一种示例,第一接入点设备可以从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,该漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,该一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,之后,第一接入点设备可以根据该漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。In the embodiment of the present application, before the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the identification of one or more reference access point devices may be determined. As an example, the first access point device may obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, where the roaming device list includes the identities of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access points The point device is the neighbor access point device of the first access point device. After that, the first access point device may determine as one or more third access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list. A third access point device with reference to the access point device.
在一些实施例中,一个或多个第二接入点设备可以包括一个或多个第三接入点设备。这样,第一接入点设备根据该漫游设备列表,从该一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备的实现过程可以为:根据该漫游设备列表,从一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到一个或多个参考接入点设备。In some embodiments, the one or more second access point devices may include one or more third access point devices. In this way, the first access point device determines from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list the implementation process of the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices. This is: according to the roaming device list, a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition is selected from one or more third access point devices to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
由于第一接入点设备可以通过主动的方式或者被动的方式,从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,从而从该漫游设备列表中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备的标识,将选择的第三接入点设备的标识作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。接下来通过下述两种方式,对确定一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识的完整实现过程进行介绍。Because the first access point device can obtain the roaming device list from the access control device in an active or passive manner, and thereby select the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from the roaming device list , And use the identification of the selected third access point device as the identification of one or more reference access point devices. Next, the complete implementation process of determining the identity of one or more reference access point devices is introduced in the following two ways.
第一种方式、第一接入点设备接收并存储接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表,该漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,该一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。这样,在第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,第一接入点设备可以从该漫游设备列表中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备的标识,将选择的第三接入点设备的标识作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。In the first way, the first access point device receives and stores a roaming device list sent by the access control device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, and the one or more third access point devices The access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device. In this way, before the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the first access point device can select the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guidance condition from the roaming device list, and select The identifier of the third access point device serves as the identifier of one or more reference access point devices.
在一些实施例中,接入控制设备可以针对不同的接入点设备确定对应的漫游设备列表,并将漫游设备列表发送给对应的接入点设备。以第一接入点设备为例,接入控制设备确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表之后,可以向第一接入点设备发送该漫游设备列表。由于漫游设备列表中包括从第一接入点设备能够漫游到的其他所有接入点设备的标识,但是有的接入点设备可能并不能满足参考漫游引导条件,所以,第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,可以从该漫游设备列表中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备的标识作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。In some embodiments, the access control device may determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and send the roaming device list to the corresponding access point device. Taking the first access point device as an example, after determining the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device, the access control device may send the roaming device list to the first access point device. Since the roaming device list includes the identities of all other access point devices that can roam from the first access point device, but some access point devices may not meet the reference roaming guide conditions, so the first access point device Before sending the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guidance condition can be selected from the roaming device list as the identity of one or more reference access point devices.
对于上述第一种方式,接入控制设备可以主动将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。这样,在后续第一接入点设备对目标终端进行漫游引导时,可以直接从该漫游引导列表中确定一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,而无需与接入控制设备进行交互,减少了开销。For the first method described above, the access control device may actively send the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device to the first access point device. In this way, when the first access point device subsequently guides the target terminal in roaming, the identification of one or more reference access point devices can be directly determined from the roaming guide list without interacting with the access control device, reducing了overhead.
比如,第一接入点设备接收并存储接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表包括一个第三接入点设备的标识。在第一接入点设备向目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,假设第一接入点设备确定该漫游设备列表中的这个第三接入点设备满足参考漫游引导条件,那么,第一接入点设备可以直接将该漫游引导列表中的这个第三接入点设备的标识作为参考接入点设备的标识。For example, the first access point device receives and stores the roaming device list sent by the access control device including an identifier of the third access point device. Before the first access point device sends the roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, assuming that the first access point device determines that the third access point device in the roaming device list meets the reference roaming guidance condition, then the first access point The device may directly use the identifier of the third access point device in the roaming guide list as the identifier of the reference access point device.
可选地,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备下发漫游设备列表时,还可以下发该漫游设备列表中包括的接入点设备的数量。Optionally, when the access control device delivers the roaming device list to the first access point device, it may also send the number of access point devices included in the roaming device list below.
第二种方式、第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识。接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,该漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,该一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备。之后,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送该漫游设备列表。第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表,并从该漫游设备列表中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备的标识,将选择的第三接入点设备的标识作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识。In the second way, the first access point device sends a list acquisition request to the access control device, and the list acquisition request carries the identity of the first access point device. The access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and determines a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, and the roaming device list includes one or more first access point devices. The identifier of the third access point device, and the one or more third access point devices are neighbor access point devices of the first access point device. After that, the access control device sends the roaming device list to the first access point device. The first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device, and selects the identity of the third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from the roaming device list, and sets the identity of the selected third access point device The identifier serves as the identifier of one or more reference access point devices.
在一些实施例中,接入控制设备可以对不同的接入点设备确定对应的漫游设备列表,之后,将各个接入点设备的设备标识以及对应的漫游设备列表,存储至设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中。这样,当第一接入点设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表时,可以根据第一接入点设备的标识,从存储的设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,并将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。In some embodiments, the access control device may determine the corresponding roaming device list for different access point devices, and then store the device identification of each access point device and the corresponding roaming device list in the device identification and roaming device list. Correspondence between the lists. In this way, when the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device, it can compare the stored device identification with the identification of the first access point device according to the identification of the first access point device. In the correspondence between the roaming device lists, the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is determined, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device.
在另一些实施例中,接入控制设备可以对不同的接入点设备确定对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,然后,接入控制设备可以将各个接入点设备的设备标识和对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。也即是,将各个接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,将各个接入点设备对应的第三接入点设备的标识作为第二设备标识,将各个接入点设备的设备标识和对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。这样,当第一接入点设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表时,可以将第一接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,从第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中,确定对应的一个或多个第二设备标识,进而将确定的一个或多个第二设备标识作为第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。然后,生成包括该一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识的漫游设备列表,将该漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备。In other embodiments, the access control device may determine the identity of one or more corresponding third access point devices for different access point devices, and then, the access control device may assign the device of each access point device The identifier and the corresponding identifier of one or more third access point devices are stored in the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. That is, the identifier of each access point device is used as the first device identifier, the identifier of the third access point device corresponding to each access point device is used as the second device identifier, and the device identifier of each access point device is combined with The identities of the corresponding one or more third access point devices are stored in the correspondence between the first device identity and the second device identity. In this way, when the first access point device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the identity of the first access point device can be used as the first device identity, from In the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier, determine the corresponding one or more second device identifiers, and then use the determined one or more second device identifiers as one corresponding to the first access point device Or the identities of multiple third access point devices. Then, a roaming device list including the identities of the one or more third access point devices is generated, and the roaming device list is sent to the first access point device.
对于上述第二种方式,接入控制设备确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识之后,并未生成漫游设备列表下发给第一接入点设备,而是存储设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系,或者存储第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系。在第一接入点设备对某个终端(比如目标终端)进行漫游引导,且接入控制设备接收到第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求时,接入控制设备可以按照上述方式确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,并将第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表发送给第一接入点设备,这样在第一接入点设备对应的漫游引导列表更新的情况下,可以保证第一接入点设备能够获取到准确性较高的漫游设备列表。For the second method described above, after the access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device, it does not generate a roaming device list and send it to the first access point device. Instead, the corresponding relationship between the device identifier and the roaming device list is stored, or the corresponding relationship between the first device identifier and the second device identifier is stored. When the first access point device conducts roaming guidance for a certain terminal (such as a target terminal), and the access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, the access control device may determine the first A roaming device list corresponding to the access point device, and the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device is sent to the first access point device, so that when the roaming guide list corresponding to the first access point device is updated It can ensure that the first access point device can obtain a list of roaming devices with higher accuracy.
比如,第一接入点设备向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,该列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识为48f8-db86-3460。接入控制设备接收第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,根据第一接入点设备的标识,从如下表3所示的设备标识与漫游设备列表之间对应关系中,确定对应的漫游设备列表包括一个第三接入点设备,且该第三接入点设备的标识为48f8-db79-2420。之后,接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送该漫游设备列表。第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表,假设该漫游设备列表中的这个第三接入点设备满足参考漫游引导条件,那么,第一接入点设备可以直接将该漫游引导列表中的这个第三接入 点设备的标识作为参考接入点设备的标识。For example, the first access point device sends a list acquisition request to the access control device, and the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device as 48f8-db86-3460. The access control device receives the list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, and according to the identification of the first access point device, determines the corresponding roaming from the corresponding relationship between the device identification and the roaming device list shown in Table 3 below. The device list includes a third access point device, and the identifier of the third access point device is 48f8-db79-2420. After that, the access control device sends the roaming device list to the first access point device. The first access point device receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device. Assuming that the third access point device in the roaming device list meets the reference roaming guide condition, the first access point device can directly roam the device. The identifier of this third access point device in the boot list is used as the identifier of the reference access point device.
表3table 3
设备标识Equipment Identity 漫游设备列表Roaming device list
48f8-db86-346048f8-db86-3460 48f8-db79-242048f8-db79-2420
48f8-db06-f9e048f8-db06-f9e0 48f8-db86-2f80、48f8-db07-0ba048f8-db86-2f80, 48f8-db07-0ba0
............ ............
在上述第二种方式中,接入控制设备根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表之前,还可以确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。即:接入控制设备获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,该多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备,漫游体验指示信息用于指示与第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质量是否改善。接入控制设备根据该多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。接入控制设备按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储该一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。In the above-mentioned second manner, before determining the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, the access control device may also determine one or more corresponding roaming devices of the first access point device. The identity of the third access point device. That is: the access control device obtains multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved. The access control device determines the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
基于上述描述,接入控制设备可以存储设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系,还可以存储第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系。所以,接入控制设备按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储该一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识的实现过程可以为:接入控制设备将第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识生成一个漫游设备列表,即第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,之后,接入控制设备可以将第一接入点设备的标识和第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,存储至设备标识与漫游设备列表之间的对应关系中。或者,接入控制设备可以将第一接入点设备的标识作为第一设备标识,将第一接入点设备对应的第三接入点设备的标识作为第二设备标识,将第一接入点设备的标识和第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,存储至第一设备标识与第二设备标识之间的对应关系中。Based on the foregoing description, the access control device may store the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list, and may also store the correspondence between the first device identifier and the second device identifier. Therefore, the access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device. Or multiple third access point device identifiers to generate a roaming device list, that is, a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. After that, the access control device can combine the identifier of the first access point device with the first access point device. The roaming device list corresponding to the in-point device is stored in the correspondence between the device identifier and the roaming device list. Alternatively, the access control device may use the identity of the first access point device as the first device identity, use the identity of the third access point device corresponding to the first access point device as the second device identity, and use the first access point device as the second device identity. The identification of the point device and the identification of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device are stored in the correspondence between the first device identification and the second device identification.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,第一接入点设备可以向接入控制设备上报自身与目标终端通信时的信号强度,而且还可以向接入控制设备上报自身向目标终端下发的漫游引导指令中携带的一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识、引导的次数等信息。同理,其他的接入点设备也可以向接入控制设备上报上述信息。比如,假设目标终端漫游至该一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个参考接入点设备,这个参考接入点设备可以向接入控制设备上报自身与目标终端通信时的信号强度。这样,接入控制设备即可按照这些信息来确定一条漫游记录,该漫游记录中的源接入点设备的标识为第一接入点设备的标识,目的接入点设备的标识为漫游后的这个参考接入点设备的标识,漫游体验指示信息可以按照漫游前的信号强度和漫游后的信号强度来确定。It should be noted that in this embodiment of the application, the first access point device can report to the access control device its signal strength when communicating with the target terminal, and can also report to the access control device that it sends to the target terminal. Information such as the identification of one or more reference access point devices and the number of guides carried in the roaming guidance instruction. In the same way, other access point devices can also report the above information to the access control device. For example, suppose that the target terminal roams to a reference access point device among the one or more reference access point devices, and this reference access point device can report the signal strength of itself when communicating with the target terminal to the access control device. In this way, the access control device can determine a roaming record based on this information, the identity of the source access point device in the roaming record is the identity of the first access point device, and the identity of the destination access point device is the identity of the roaming With reference to the identification of the access point device, the roaming experience indication information can be determined according to the signal strength before roaming and the signal strength after roaming.
同理,接入控制设备可以确定出多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息。In the same way, the access control device can determine multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record.
在一些实施例中,接入控制设备根据该多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,包括:接入控制设备按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从该多条历史漫游记录中, 选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录。接入控制设备将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识,确定为第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。In some embodiments, the access control device determines one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device based on the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record The identifier includes: the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device determines the identity of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record as the identity of one or more third access point devices corresponding to the first access point device.
在另一些实施例中,接入控制设备根据该多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,可以按照强化学习的方式,确定第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。即,接入控制设备按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从该多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录。接入控制设备获取第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且该邻居接入点设备未包含在该多条历史漫游记录中。接入控制设备将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为第一接入点设备对应的一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。In other embodiments, the access control device may determine one or the corresponding roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning according to the multiple historical roaming records. Identities of multiple third access point devices. That is, the access control device selects the historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records according to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The access control device obtains the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records. The access control device determines the identification of the destination access point device included in the selected historical roaming record and the acquired identification of the neighbor access point device as one or more third access points corresponding to the first access point device The identification of the device.
需要说明的是,强化学习是AI算法中的一种,强化学习指的是面向目标的算法,这种学习算法可以使确定的一个或多个第三接入点设备更趋于精准化。也即是,通过强化学习的方式确定的一个或多个第三接入点设备为从第一接入点设备漫游后的信号质量改善的接入点设备。另外,由于多个历史漫游记录包括之前漫游引导过的接入点设备,但是未进行漫游引导过的接入点设备也有可能是信号质量改善的接入点设备,所以,还可以将未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备作为第三接入点设备。其中,未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备可以按照一定的规则来确定。It should be noted that reinforcement learning is a type of AI algorithm. Reinforcement learning refers to a goal-oriented algorithm. This learning algorithm can make the determined one or more third access point devices more accurate. That is, the one or more third access point devices determined by means of reinforcement learning are access point devices with improved signal quality after roaming from the first access point device. In addition, since multiple historical roaming records include access point devices that have been guided by roaming before, but the access point devices that have not been guided by roaming may also be access point devices with improved signal quality, so they can also be included in the The neighbor access point device of the multiple historical roaming records serves as the third access point device. Among them, the neighbor access point devices that are not included in the multiple historical roaming records can be determined according to certain rules.
作为一种示例,接入控制设备可以确定第一类接入点设备的数量,第一类接入点设备是指漫游的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录中的目的接入点设备。之后,接入控制设备可以用第一类接入点设备的数量除以参考比例,得到第二类接入点设备的数量,第二类接入点设备是指未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备,参考比例是指一个或多个第三接入点设备中第一类接入点设备与第二类接入点设备之间的数量比例。这样,接入控制设备可以按照第二类接入点设备的数量,从未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备中选择邻居接入点设备作为第三接入点设备。As an example, the access control device may determine the number of access point devices of the first type, where the first type of access point devices refers to the destination access point devices in the historical roaming record of improved roaming signal quality. After that, the access control device can divide the number of access point devices of the first type by the reference ratio to obtain the number of access point devices of the second type. The second type of access point devices are those that are not included in the multiple historical roaming For the recorded neighbor access point devices, the reference ratio refers to the ratio of the number of access point devices of the first type to the access point devices of the second type in one or more third access point devices. In this way, the access control device can select the neighbor access point device as the third access point device from the neighbor access point devices that have never been included in the multiple historical roaming records according to the number of the second type of access point devices.
比如,参考比例为8:2,接入控制设备确定的第一类接入点设备的数量为4个,那么,第二类接入点设备的数量即为1个。所以,接入控制设备不仅可以将4个第一类接入点设备作为第三接入点设备,还可以从未包含在该多条历史漫游记录的邻居接入点设备中选择一个邻居接入点设备作为第三接入点设备。For example, if the reference ratio is 8:2, and the number of access point devices of the first type determined by the access control device is 4, then the number of access point devices of the second type is one. Therefore, the access control device can not only use 4 access point devices of the first type as the third access point device, but can also select one of the neighbor access point devices that have not been included in the multiple historical roaming records for access. The point device serves as the third access point device.
由于第一类接入点设备可以大概率地保证漫游引导成功,也即是,可以保证漫游引导的成功率。但是,为了达到强化学习的效果,可以加入一些未包含在历史漫游记录中的邻居接入点设备。不过通常情况下,第一类接入点设备的数量比第二类接入点设备的数量多。也即是,第一类接入点设备的数量占比比第二类接入点设备的数量占比大。Since the first type of access point device can guarantee the success of roaming guidance with a high probability, that is, it can guarantee the success rate of roaming guidance. However, in order to achieve the effect of reinforcement learning, some neighbor access point devices that are not included in the historical roaming record can be added. However, in general, the number of access point devices of the first type is greater than the number of access point devices of the second type. That is, the number of access point devices of the first type accounts for a larger proportion than the number of access point devices of the second type.
需要说明的是,上述按照参考比例确定第二类接入点设备的数量只是一种实现方式,在另一些实施例中,还可以通过其他的方式来确定,只要第一类接入点设备的数量占比比第二类接入点设备的数量占比大即可。It should be noted that the above-mentioned determination of the number of access point devices of the second type according to the reference ratio is only an implementation method. In other embodiments, it can also be determined in other ways, as long as the number of access point devices of the first type is The quantity ratio can be larger than the quantity ratio of the second type of access point devices.
其中,在本申请实施例中,可以周期性地进行强化学习,且每进行一次强化学习,确定的一个或多个第三接入点设备就越趋于精准化。Among them, in the embodiment of the present application, reinforcement learning may be performed periodically, and each time reinforcement learning is performed, the determined one or more third access point devices become more precise.
基于上述步骤501的描述,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括的第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备可以通过第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表确定。其中,第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表可以按照上述两种方式中的相关实现方式来获取,也即是,可以接收接入控制 设备主动推送的漫游设备列表,也可以向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求之后,接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表。Based on the description of step 501 above, the neighbor access point devices of the first access point device included in the one or more second access point devices may be determined through the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device. Among them, the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device can be obtained according to the related implementation of the above two methods, that is, the roaming device list proactively pushed by the access control device can be received, or the roaming device list can be sent to the access control device. After the device sends the list acquisition request, it receives the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
步骤504:目标终端接收第一接入点设备发送的漫游引导指令,根据该漫游引导指令携带的一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识进行漫游。Step 504: The target terminal receives the roaming guidance instruction sent by the first access point device, and performs roaming according to the identification of one or more reference access point devices carried in the roaming guidance instruction.
由于参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次引导测试之后确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,但是该参考漫游引导条件不一定和目标终端中内置的漫游规则相符。所以,目标终端接收到第一接入点设备发送的漫游引导指令之后,可以判断该一个或多个参考接入点设备中是否存在满足目标终端内置的漫游规则的参考接入点设备。如果存在,那么目标终端可以按照满足自身内置的漫游规则的参考接入点设备的标识进行漫游,也即是,从与第一接入点设备的关联切换至与满足自身内置的漫游规则的参考接入点设备的关联。Since the reference roaming guidance condition is determined after the access control device performs multiple guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, the reference model is the model of the target terminal, but the reference roaming guidance condition may not necessarily match the target The built-in roaming rules in the terminal match. Therefore, after the target terminal receives the roaming guidance instruction sent by the first access point device, it can determine whether there is a reference access point device that meets the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal among the one or more reference access point devices. If it exists, the target terminal can roam according to the identity of the reference access point device that meets its own built-in roaming rules, that is, switch from the association with the first access point device to the reference that meets its own built-in roaming rules The association of the access point device.
但是,如果该一个或多个参考接入点设备中不存在满足目标终端内置的漫游规则的参考接入点设备,那么,目标终端便不会进行漫游。也即是,维持与第一接入点设备的关联。However, if there is no reference access point device that meets the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal among the one or more reference access point devices, then the target terminal will not roam. That is, the association with the first access point device is maintained.
综上所述,在本申请实施例中,由于参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以,参考漫游引导条件和目标终端内置的漫游规则相差不大。这样,在第一接入点设备获取到参考漫游引导条件,并确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,就算目标终端不是无条件地服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,但是也可以大概率地引导目标终端漫游成功。而且,接入控制设备针对不同款型的终端确定不同的漫游引导条件,就算不同款型的终端内置的漫游规则不同,按照上述方法进行漫游引导也可以提高漫游引导的成功率。In summary, in this embodiment of the application, since the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming guidance conditions and the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal are not much different. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游引导装置的结构示意图,该装置位于第一接入点设备中。该装置可以由软件、硬件或者两者的结合实现成为第一接入点设备的部分或者全部。参见图6,该装置包括:第一确定模块601和第一发送模块602。FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the device is located in a first access point device. The device can be implemented as part or all of the first access point device by software, hardware, or a combination of the two. Referring to FIG. 6, the device includes: a first determining module 601 and a first sending module 602.
第一确定模块601,用于确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,一个或多个第二接入点设备包括第一接入点设备和/或第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,目标终端是指与第一接入点设备关联的一个终端;The first determining module 601 is used to determine the signal strength of each second access point device in the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, to obtain one or more signal strengths, and one or more first The second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device;
第一确定模块601,还用于根据该一个或多个信号强度确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module 601 is further configured to determine, according to the one or more signal strengths, that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition;
第一发送模块602,用于在第一确定模块确定出目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,向目标终端发送漫游引导指令,漫游引导指令携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,漫游引导指令用于引导目标终端漫游到一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型是指目标终端的款型。The first sending module 602 is configured to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal when the first determining module determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition. The roaming guidance instruction carries the identification of one or more reference access point devices, and the roaming guidance The instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of one or more reference access point devices. The reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model. , The reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二确定模块,用于确定目标终端的款型标识;The second determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal;
第三确定模块,用于根据款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。The third determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一接收模块,用于接收并存储接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件;The first receiving module is configured to receive and store the first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device;
第三确定模块用于:The third determining module is used to:
根据目标终端的款型标识,从第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件。According to the model identifier of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the first corresponding relationship.
可选地,第三确定模块包括:Optionally, the third determining module includes:
第一发送子模块,用于向接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识;The first sending submodule is configured to send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
第一接收子模块,用接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的款型标识,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first receiving sub-module receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device, and the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device from the first correspondence stored in itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal. The corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device.
可选地,第二确定模块包括:Optionally, the second determining module includes:
获取子模块,用于从接入控制设备中获取目标终端的款型标识。The obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
可选地,获取子模块包括:Optionally, the obtaining submodule includes:
发送单元,用于向接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址,第一接入点设备接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识;或者The sending unit is configured to send a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device ;or
接收单元,用于接收接入控制设备发送的目标终端的款型标识,目标终端的款型标识为接入控制设备从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址之后,通过目标终端的MAC地址确定的。The receiving unit is configured to receive the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device. The model identifier of the target terminal is the access control device after obtaining the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal, and then through the target terminal The MAC address is determined.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二发送模块,用于向接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;The second sending module is configured to send a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
第二接收模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的参考漫游引导条件,参考漫游引导条件为接入控制设备根据目标终端的MAC地址确定目标终端的款型标识之后,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second receiving module is configured to receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device. The reference roaming guide condition is that after the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal, the first corresponding stored in itself Determined in the relationship, the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
获取模块,用于从接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The obtaining module is used to obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list includes the identification of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are the first access point devices Neighbor access point equipment;
第四确定模块,用于根据漫游设备列表,从一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。The fourth determining module is configured to determine the third access point device as one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
可选地,该获取模块包括:Optionally, the acquisition module includes:
第二接收子模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表;或者The second receiving submodule is used to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device; or
第二发送子模块,用于向接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识;第三接收子模块,用于接收接入控制设备发送的漫游设备列表。The second sending submodule is configured to send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the third receiving submodule is configured to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device.
可选地,该一个或多个第二接入点设备包括一个或多个第三接入点设备;Optionally, the one or more second access point devices include one or more third access point devices;
第四确定模块包括:The fourth determining module includes:
选择子模块,用于根据漫游设备列表,从一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到一个或多个参考接入点设备。The selection submodule is used to select a third access point device that meets the reference roaming guide condition from one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list to obtain one or more reference access point devices.
在本申请实施例中,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终 端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以,参考漫游引导条件和目标终端内置的漫游规则相差不大。这样,在第一接入点设备获取到参考漫游引导条件,并确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,就算目标终端不是无条件地服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,但是也可以大概率地引导目标终端漫游成功。而且,接入控制设备针对不同款型的终端确定不同的漫游引导条件,就算不同款型的终端内置的漫游规则不同,按照上述方法进行漫游引导也可以提高漫游引导的成功率。In the embodiment of this application, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming The guiding conditions are not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
需要说明的是:上述实施例提供的漫游引导装置在漫游引导时,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。另外,上述实施例提供的漫游引导装置与漫游引导方法实施例属于同一构思,其具体实现过程详见方法实施例,这里不再赘述。It should be noted that the roaming guidance device provided in the above embodiment only uses the division of the above functional modules for example during roaming guidance. In actual applications, the above functions can be allocated by different functional modules according to needs, i.e. The internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. In addition, the roaming guidance device provided in the foregoing embodiment and the roaming guidance method embodiment belong to the same concept, and the specific implementation process is detailed in the method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种漫游引导装置的结构示意图,该装置位于接入控制设备中。该装置可以由软件、硬件或者两者的结合实现成为接入控制设备的部分或者全部。参见图7,该装置包括:第一确定模块701和第一发送模块702。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a roaming guidance device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the device is located in an access control device. The device can be implemented as part or all of the access control equipment by software, hardware or a combination of the two. Referring to FIG. 7, the device includes: a first determining module 701 and a first sending module 702.
第一确定模块701,用于通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module 701 is configured to determine a reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
第一发送模块702,用于向第一接入点设备发送参考漫游引导条件,其中,第一接入点设备所关联的目标终端的款型为参考款型,第一接入点设备是指接入控制设备所控制的一个接入点设备。The first sending module 702 is configured to send a reference roaming guide condition to the first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device refers to An access point device controlled by the access control device.
可选地,第一发送模块用于:Optionally, the first sending module is used to:
向第一接入点设备发送第一对应关系,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first correspondence is sent to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,第一引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的款型标识;A first receiving module, configured to receive a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by a first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries a model identifier of the target terminal;
第二确定模块,用于根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second determining module is used to determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device Guidance conditions.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第一获取模块,用于获取目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址;The first obtaining module is used to obtain the media access control MAC address of the target terminal;
第三确定模块,用于根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;The third determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device. Model identification;
第二发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送目标终端的款型标识,以使第一接入点设备根据目标终端的款型标识确定参考漫游引导条件。The second sending module is configured to send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
可选地,第一获取模块包括:Optionally, the first obtaining module includes:
接收子模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,款型查询请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;或者The receiving sub-module is configured to receive the model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal; or
获取子模块,用于从目标终端发送的数据报文中获取目标终端的MAC地址。The obtaining sub-module is used to obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,第二引导条件获取请求携带目标终端的MAC地址;The second receiving module is configured to receive a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
第四确定模块,用于根据目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定目标终端的款型标识,第二对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;根据目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中,确定参考漫游引导条件,第一对应关系用于指示接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The fourth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship based on the MAC address of the target terminal. The second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the corresponding MAC address identified by the access control device. Model ID: According to the model ID of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the stored first correspondence. The first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance condition corresponding to each model ID identified by the access control device .
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二获取模块,用于从目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型描述信息;The second acquiring module is configured to acquire the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
第五确定模块,用于根据目标终端的款型描述信息,确定目标终端的款型标识;The fifth determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
第一存储模块,用于将目标终端的MAC地址和目标终端的款型标识,存储至第二对应关系中。The first storage module is used to store the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第三接收模块,用于接收第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,列表获取请求携带第一接入点设备的标识;The third receiving module is configured to receive a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
第六确定模块,用于根据第一接入点设备的标识,确定第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,一个或多个第三接入点设备为第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The sixth determining module is configured to determine a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identity of the first access point device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of the third access point device, one or more The third access point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
第三发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送漫游设备列表。The third sending module is used to send the roaming device list to the first access point device.
可选地,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第三获取模块,用于获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备,漫游体验指示信息用于指示与第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质量是否改善;The third acquisition module is used to acquire multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the destination access point device corresponding to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality afterwards is improved;
第七确定模块,用于根据多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识;The seventh determining module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
第二存储模块,用于按照第一接入点设备的标识,存储一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The second storage module is configured to store the identities of one or more third access point devices according to the identities of the first access point devices.
可选地,第七确定模块包括:Optionally, the seventh determining module includes:
确定子模块,用于根据多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,按照强化学习的方式,确定一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The determining sub-module is used to determine the identity of one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
可选地,确定子模块用于:Optionally, determine the sub-module for:
按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录;According to the roaming experience instruction information corresponding to each historical roaming record, select historical roaming records with improved signal quality after roaming from multiple historical roaming records;
获取第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且邻居接入点设备未包含在多条历史漫游记录中;Acquiring the identifier of the neighboring access point device of the first access point device, and the neighboring access point device is not included in multiple historical roaming records;
将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record are determined as the identification of one or more third access point devices.
可选地,第一确定模块用于:Optionally, the first determining module is used to:
确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为第一接入点设备;Determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination. Each access point device combination includes the identification of the source access point device and the identification of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the access point device combination are all the first access point devices;
按照多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定参考漫游引导条件。According to multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, use different guidance test conditions to perform multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to succeed One or more terminals belonging to the reference model are guided to roam as a standard to determine the reference roaming guidance conditions.
可选地,该多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。Optionally, the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining different values of one or more dimensional features, and the one or more dimensional features include one or more of signal strength, channel, frequency band, and load.
在本申请实施例中,参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,参考款型为目标终端的款型,所以,参考漫游引导条件和目标终端内置的漫游规则相差不大。这样,在第一接入点设备获取到参考漫游引导条件,并确定目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件时,就算目标终端不是无条件地服从第一接入点设备的漫游引导,但是也可以大概率地引导目标终端漫游成功。而且,接入控制设备针对不同款型的终端确定不同的漫游引导条件,就算不同款型的终端内置的漫游规则不同,按照上述方法进行漫游引导也可以提高漫游引导的成功率。In the embodiment of this application, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined by the access control device performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and the reference model is the model of the target terminal. Therefore, the reference roaming The guiding conditions are not much different from the built-in roaming rules of the target terminal. In this way, when the first access point device obtains the reference roaming guidance condition and determines that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, even if the target terminal does not unconditionally obey the roaming guidance of the first access point device, it can still have a high probability Guide the target terminal to roam successfully. Moreover, the access control device determines different roaming guidance conditions for different types of terminals. Even if different types of terminals have different built-in roaming rules, performing roaming guidance according to the above method can also increase the success rate of roaming guidance.
需要说明的是:上述实施例提供的漫游引导装置在漫游引导时,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。另外,上述实施例提供的漫游引导装置与漫游引导方法实施例属于同一构思,其具体实现过程详见方法实施例,这里不再赘述。It should be noted that the roaming guidance device provided in the above embodiment only uses the division of the above-mentioned functional modules for example during roaming guidance. In actual applications, the above-mentioned function allocation can be completed by different functional modules as needed, i.e. The internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. In addition, the roaming guidance device provided in the foregoing embodiment and the roaming guidance method embodiment belong to the same concept, and the specific implementation process is detailed in the method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意结合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络或其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如:同轴电缆、光纤、数据用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如:红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质,或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如:软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如:数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc,DVD))或半导体介质(例如:固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。值得注意的是,本申请提到的计算机可读存储介质可以为非易失性存储介质,换句话说,可以是非瞬时性存储介质。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (for example: coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (for example: infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example: floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical medium (for example: digital versatile disc (DVD)) or semiconductor medium (for example: solid state disk (SSD)) Wait. It should be noted that the computer-readable storage medium mentioned in this application may be a non-volatile storage medium, in other words, it may be a non-transitory storage medium.
应当理解的是,本文提及的“至少一个”是指一个或多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本文中 的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。It should be understood that "at least one" mentioned herein refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this document is only an association relationship describing associated objects, It means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in order to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same or similar items with substantially the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the difference.
以上所述为本申请提供的实施例,并不用以限制本申请,凡在本申请的精神和原则之内,所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。The above-mentioned examples provided for this application are not intended to limit this application. Any modification, equivalent replacement, improvement, etc. made within the spirit and principle of this application shall be included in the protection scope of this application. Inside.

Claims (51)

  1. 一种漫游引导方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A roaming guidance method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一接入点设备确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,所述一个或多个第二接入点设备包括所述第一接入点设备和/或所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,所述目标终端是指与所述第一接入点设备关联的一个终端;The first access point device determines the signal strength of each second access point device in the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal, and obtains one or more signal strengths. The second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to one associated with the first access point device terminal;
    如果根据所述一个或多个信号强度确定所述目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件,则所述第一接入点设备向所述目标终端发送漫游引导指令,所述漫游引导指令携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,所述漫游引导指令用于引导所述目标终端漫游到所述一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个,所述参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,所述参考款型是指所述目标终端的款型。If it is determined according to the one or more signal strengths that the target terminal meets the reference roaming guidance condition, the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, and the roaming guidance instruction carries one or more With reference to the identifier of the access point device, the roaming guidance instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of the one or more reference access point devices, and the reference roaming guidance condition is that the access control device passes One or more terminals belonging to the reference model are determined by performing multiple roaming guidance tests, and the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述一个或多个信号强度确定所述目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the determining that the target terminal satisfies a reference roaming guidance condition according to the one or more signal strengths, the method further comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备确定所述目标终端的款型标识;Determining, by the first access point device, the model identifier of the target terminal;
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件。The first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备接收并存储所述接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件;The first access point device receives and stores a first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device condition;
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件,包括:The determining, by the first access point device, the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier includes:
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从所述第一对应关系中,确定所述参考漫游引导条件。The first access point device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the first correspondence according to the model identifier of the target terminal.
  4. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入点设备根据所述款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件,包括:The method of claim 2, wherein the first access point device determining the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备向所述接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,所述第一引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的款型标识;Sending, by the first access point device, a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
    所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述参考漫游引导条件,所述参考漫游引导条件为所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first access point device receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device, where the reference roaming guidance condition is that the access control device stores from itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal The first correspondence is determined in the first correspondence relationship, and the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  5. 如权利要求2-4任一项权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入点设备确定所述目标终端的款型标识,包括:The method according to any one of claims 2-4, wherein the first access point device determining the model identifier of the target terminal comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备从所述接入控制设备中获取所述目标终端的款型标识。The first access point device obtains the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入点设备从所述接入控制设备中获取所述目标终端的款型标识,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the obtaining, by the first access point device, the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device, comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备向所述接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,所述款型查询请求携带所述目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址,所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述目标终端的款型标识;或者The first access point device sends a model query request to the access control device, the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the media access control MAC address of the target terminal. The model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device; or
    所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述目标终端的款型标识,所述目标终端的款型标识为所述接入控制设备从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中获取所述目标终端的MAC地址之后,通过所述目标终端的MAC地址确定的。The first access point device receives the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device, where the model identifier of the target terminal is a datagram sent by the access control device from the target terminal After obtaining the MAC address of the target terminal in the text, it is determined by the MAC address of the target terminal.
  7. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述一个或多个信号强度确定所述目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the determining that the target terminal satisfies a reference roaming guidance condition according to the one or more signal strengths, the method further comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备向所述接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,所述第二引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;Sending, by the first access point device, a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
    所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述参考漫游引导条件,所述参考漫游引导条件为所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的MAC地址确定所述目标终端的款型标识之后,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first access point device receives the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device, where the reference roaming guidance condition is that the access control device determines the target terminal according to the MAC address of the target terminal After the model type identifier is determined from the first corresponding relationship stored by itself, the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model type identifier identified by the access control device.
  8. 如权利要求1-7任一项权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入点设备向所述目标终端发送漫游引导指令之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein before the first access point device sends a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备从所述接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,所述漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,所述一个或多个第三接入点设备为所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The first access point device obtains a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list includes one or more identities of third access point devices, and the one or more third access points The point device is a neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述漫游设备列表,从所述一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为所述一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。The first access point device determines the third access point device as the one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list .
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入点设备从所述接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the first access point device acquiring a roaming device list from the access control device comprises:
    所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述漫游设备列表;或者Receiving, by the first access point device, the roaming device list sent by the access control device; or
    所述第一接入点设备向所述接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,所述列表获取请求携带所述第一接入点设备的标识;所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述漫游设备列表。The first access point device sends a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the first access point device receives the access The roaming device list sent by the control device.
  10. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个或多个第二接入点设备包括所述一个或多个第三接入点设备;The method according to claim 8, wherein the one or more second access point devices comprise the one or more third access point devices;
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述漫游设备列表,从所述一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为所述一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备,包括:The first access point device determines the third access point device as the one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list ,include:
    所述第一接入点设备根据所述漫游设备列表,从所述一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足所述参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到所述一个或多个参考接入点设备。According to the roaming device list, the first access point device selects a third access point device that satisfies the reference roaming guide condition from the one or more third access point devices to obtain the one or Multiple reference access point devices.
  11. 一种漫游引导方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A roaming guidance method, characterized in that the method includes:
    接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件;The access control device determines the reference roaming guidance conditions by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
    所述接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送所述参考漫游引导条件,其中,所述第一接入点设备所关联的目标终端的款型为所述参考款型,所述第一接入点设备是指所述接入控制设备所控制的一个接入点设备。The access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to a first access point device, where the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first The access point device refers to an access point device controlled by the access control device.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送所述参考漫游引导条件,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the sending, by the access control device, the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device comprises:
    所述接入控制设备向所述第一接入点设备发送第一对应关系,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The access control device sends a first correspondence to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  13. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送所述参考漫游引导条件之前,还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein before the access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device, the method further comprises:
    所述接入控制设备接收所述第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,所述第一引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的款型标识;Receiving, by the access control device, a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定所述参考漫游引导条件,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate the information identified by the access control device The roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier.
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述接入控制设备获取所述目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址;Acquiring, by the access control device, the media access control MAC address of the target terminal;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定所述目标终端的款型标识,所述第二对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence relationship is used to instruct the access control device to identify The model ID corresponding to each MAC address listed;
    所述接入控制设备向所述第一接入点设备发送所述目标终端的款型标识,以使所述第一接入点设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件。The access control device sends the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming guide according to the model identifier of the target terminal condition.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备获取所述目标终端的MAC地址,包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein the acquiring, by the access control device, the MAC address of the target terminal comprises:
    所述接入控制设备接收所述第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,所述款型查询请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;或者Receiving, by the access control device, a model query request sent by the first access point device, the model query request carrying the MAC address of the target terminal; or
    所述接入控制设备从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中获取所述目标终端的MAC地址。The access control device obtains the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  16. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备向第一接入点设备发送所述参考漫游引导条件之前,还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein before the access control device sends the reference roaming guidance condition to the first access point device, the method further comprises:
    所述接入控制设备接收所述第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,所述第二引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;Receiving, by the access control device, a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定所述目标终端的款型标识,所述第二对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;The access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence relationship is used to instruct the access control device to identify The model ID corresponding to each MAC address listed;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中,确定所述参考漫游引导条件,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence relationship is used to instruct the access control device to identify The roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier of.
  17. 如权利要求14或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定所述目标终端的款型标识之前,还包括:The method according to claim 14 or 16, characterized in that, before the access control device determines the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence according to the MAC address of the target terminal, Also includes:
    所述接入控制设备从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取所述目标终端的MAC地址和所述目标终端的款型描述信息;Acquiring, by the access control device, the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的款型描述信息,确定所述目标终端的款型标识;Determining, by the access control device, the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
    所述接入控制设备将所述目标终端的MAC地址和所述目标终端的款型标识,存储至所述第二对应关系中。The access control device stores the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal in the second correspondence.
  18. 如权利要求11-17任一项权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-17, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述接入控制设备接收所述第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,所述列表获取请求携带所述第一接入点设备的标识;Receiving, by the access control device, a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述第一接入点设备的标识,确定所述第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,所述漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,所述一个或多个第三接入点设备为所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The access control device determines a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, and the roaming device list includes the information of one or more third access point devices. Identifies that the one or more third access point devices are neighbor access point devices of the first access point device;
    所述接入控制设备向所述第一接入点设备发送所述漫游设备列表。The access control device sends the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备根据所述第一接入点设备的标识,确定所述第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表之前,还包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein before the access control device determines the roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, the method further comprises:
    所述接入控制设备获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,所述多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为所述第一接入点设备,所述漫游体验指示信息用于指示与所述第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质量是否改善;The access control device obtains multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record, and each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the multiple historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the corresponding historical roaming record Whether the signal quality of the corresponding destination access point device is improved;
    所述接入控制设备根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识;The access control device determines the identity of the one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
    所述接入控制设备按照所述第一接入点设备的标识,存储所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The access control device stores the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the access control device determines the one or more third-party roaming records according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. The identification of the access point device, including:
    所述接入控制设备根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验 指示信息,按照强化学习的方式,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The access control device determines the identity of the one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,按照强化学习的方式,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein the access control device determines the said plurality of historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a reinforcement learning manner. The identification of one or more third access point devices, including:
    所述接入控制设备按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从所述多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录;According to the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record, the access control device selects a historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records;
    所述接入控制设备获取所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且所述邻居接入点设备未包含在所述多条历史漫游记录中;Acquiring, by the access control device, the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records;
    所述接入控制设备将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The access control device determines the identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record as the identification of the one or more third access point devices.
  22. 如权利要求11-21任一项权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件,包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-21, wherein the access control device determines the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model, and include:
    所述接入控制设备确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,所述多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为所述第一接入点设备;The access control device determines multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and each access point device combination includes the identity of the source access point device and the destination access point An identifier of the device, the source access point device in the multiple access point device combination is the first access point device;
    所述接入控制设备按照所述多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于所述参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于所述参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定所述参考漫游引导条件。According to the multiple access point device combinations and the multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, the access control device adopts different pilot test conditions for one or more of the reference models. The terminal performs multiple roaming guidance tests, and determines the reference roaming guidance condition by successfully guiding one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,所述一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。The method of claim 22, wherein the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining one or more dimensional features with different values, and the one or more dimensional features include signal strength, channel, and frequency band. , One or more of the loads.
  24. 一种漫游引导装置,应用于第一接入点设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A roaming guidance device applied to a first access point device, characterized in that the device includes:
    第一确定模块,用于确定一个或多个第二接入点设备中每个第二接入点设备与目标终端通信时的信号强度,得到一个或多个信号强度,所述一个或多个第二接入点设备包括第一接入点设备和/或所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备,所述目标终端是指与所述第一接入点设备关联的一个终端;The first determining module is used to determine the signal strength of each of the one or more second access point devices when communicating with the target terminal to obtain one or more signal strengths. The second access point device includes the first access point device and/or the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the target terminal refers to a terminal associated with the first access point device ;
    所述第一确定模块,还用于根据所述一个或多个信号强度确定所述目标终端满足参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module is further configured to determine, according to the one or more signal strengths, that the target terminal satisfies a reference roaming guidance condition;
    第一发送模块,用于在所述第一确定模块确定出所述目标终端满足所述参考漫游引导条件时,向所述目标终端发送漫游引导指令,所述漫游引导指令携带一个或多个参考接入点设备的标识,所述漫游引导指令用于引导所述目标终端漫游到所述一个或多个参考接入点设备中的一个,所述参考漫游引导条件是接入控制设备通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定的,所述参考款型是指所述目标终端的款型。The first sending module is configured to send a roaming guidance instruction to the target terminal when the first determining module determines that the target terminal satisfies the reference roaming guidance condition, where the roaming guidance instruction carries one or more references The identification of the access point device, the roaming guidance instruction is used to guide the target terminal to roam to one of the one or more reference access point devices, and the reference roaming guidance condition is that the access control device One or more terminals of the reference model are determined by performing multiple roaming guidance tests, and the reference model refers to the model of the target terminal.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 24, wherein the device further comprises:
    第二确定模块,用于确定所述目标终端的款型标识;The second determining module is used to determine the model identifier of the target terminal;
    第三确定模块,用于根据所述款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件。The third determining module is configured to determine the reference roaming guidance condition according to the model identifier.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 25, wherein the device further comprises:
    第一接收模块,用于接收并存储所述接入控制设备发送的第一对应关系,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件;The first receiving module is configured to receive and store a first correspondence sent by the access control device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device ;
    所述第三确定模块用于:The third determining module is used for:
    根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从所述第一对应关系中,确定所述参考漫游引导条件。According to the model identifier of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the first correspondence.
  27. 如权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第三确定模块包括:The device according to claim 25, wherein the third determining module comprises:
    第一发送子模块,用于向所述接入控制设备发送第一引导条件获取请求,所述第一引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的款型标识;A first sending submodule, configured to send a first guidance condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
    第一接收子模块,用于接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述参考漫游引导条件,所述参考漫游引导条件为所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The first receiving submodule is configured to receive the reference roaming guidance condition sent by the access control device, where the reference roaming guidance condition is that the access control device stores from itself according to the model identifier of the target terminal The first correspondence is determined in the first correspondence relationship, and the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  28. 如权利要求25-27任一项权利要求所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二确定模块包括:The device according to any one of claims 25-27, wherein the second determining module comprises:
    获取子模块,用于从所述接入控制设备中获取所述目标终端的款型标识。The obtaining submodule is used to obtain the model identifier of the target terminal from the access control device.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述获取子模块包括:The device according to claim 28, wherein the acquiring sub-module comprises:
    发送单元,用于向所述接入控制设备发送款型查询请求,所述款型查询请求携带所述目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址,所述第一接入点设备接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述目标终端的款型标识;或者The sending unit is configured to send a model query request to the access control device, where the model query request carries the media access control MAC address of the target terminal, and the first access point device receives the access The model identifier of the target terminal sent by the control device; or
    接收单元,用于接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述目标终端的款型标识,所述目标终端的款型标识为所述接入控制设备从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中获取所述目标终端的MAC地址之后,通过所述目标终端的MAC地址确定的。The receiving unit is configured to receive the model identifier of the target terminal sent by the access control device, where the model identifier of the target terminal is obtained by the access control device from a data packet sent by the target terminal After the MAC address of the target terminal, it is determined by the MAC address of the target terminal.
  30. 如权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 24, wherein the device further comprises:
    第二发送模块,用于向所述接入控制设备发送第二引导条件获取请求,所述第二引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;A second sending module, configured to send a second guide condition acquisition request to the access control device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
    第二接收模块,用于接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述参考漫游引导条件,所述参考漫游引导条件为所述接入控制设备根据所述目标终端的MAC地址确定所述目标终端的款型标识之后,从自身存储的第一对应关系中确定的,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second receiving module is configured to receive the reference roaming guide condition sent by the access control device, where the reference roaming guide condition is that the access control device determines the target terminal's MAC address according to the target terminal's MAC address After the style identification, it is determined from the first correspondence stored by itself, and the first correspondence is used to indicate the roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each style identification identified by the access control device.
  31. 如权利要求24-30任一项权利要求所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device according to any one of claims 24-30, wherein the device further comprises:
    获取模块,用于从所述接入控制设备中获取漫游设备列表,所述漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,所述一个或多个第三接入点设备为所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The obtaining module is configured to obtain a roaming device list from the access control device, the roaming device list including the identification of one or more third access point devices, and the one or more third access point devices are A neighbor access point device of the first access point device;
    第四确定模块,用于根据所述漫游设备列表,从所述一个或多个第三接入点设备中,确定作为所述一个或多个参考接入点设备的第三接入点设备。The fourth determining module is configured to determine a third access point device as the one or more reference access point devices from the one or more third access point devices according to the roaming device list.
  32. 如权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述获取模块包括:The device of claim 31, wherein the acquisition module comprises:
    第二接收子模块,用于接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述漫游设备列表;或者The second receiving submodule is configured to receive the roaming device list sent by the access control device; or
    第二发送子模块,用于向所述接入控制设备发送列表获取请求,所述列表获取请求携带所述第一接入点设备的标识;第三接收子模块,用于接收所述接入控制设备发送的所述漫游设备列表。The second sending submodule is configured to send a list acquisition request to the access control device, where the list acquisition request carries the identifier of the first access point device; the third receiving submodule is configured to receive the access The roaming device list sent by the control device.
  33. 如权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述一个或多个第二接入点设备包括所述一个或多个第三接入点设备;The apparatus according to claim 31, wherein the one or more second access point devices comprise the one or more third access point devices;
    所述第四确定模块包括:The fourth determining module includes:
    选择子模块,用于根据所述漫游设备列表,从所述一个或多个第三接入点设备中选择满足所述参考漫游引导条件的第三接入点设备,得到所述一个或多个参考接入点设备。The selection sub-module is configured to select, according to the roaming device list, a third access point device that satisfies the reference roaming guidance condition from the one or more third access point devices to obtain the one or more Refer to the access point device.
  34. 一种漫游引导装置,应用于接入控制设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A roaming guidance device applied to access control equipment, characterized in that the device includes:
    第一确定模块,用于通过对属于参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试确定参考漫游引导条件;The first determining module is configured to determine the reference roaming guidance condition by performing multiple roaming guidance tests on one or more terminals belonging to the reference model;
    第一发送模块,用于向第一接入点设备发送所述参考漫游引导条件,其中,所述第一接入点设备所关联的目标终端的款型为所述参考款型,所述第一接入点设备是指所述接入控制设备所控制的一个接入点设备。The first sending module is configured to send the reference roaming guidance condition to a first access point device, wherein the model type of the target terminal associated with the first access point device is the reference model type, and the first access point device An access point device refers to an access point device controlled by the access control device.
  35. 如权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一发送模块用于:The device according to claim 34, wherein the first sending module is configured to:
    向所述第一接入点设备发送第一对应关系,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。Send a first correspondence to the first access point device, where the first correspondence is used to indicate roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier identified by the access control device.
  36. 如权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 34, wherein the device further comprises:
    第一接收模块,用于接收所述第一接入点设备发送的第一引导条件获取请求,所述第一引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的款型标识;A first receiving module, configured to receive a first guidance condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the first guidance condition acquisition request carries the model identifier of the target terminal;
    第二确定模块,用于根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中确定所述参考漫游引导条件,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The second determining module is configured to determine the reference roaming guidance condition from the stored first correspondence relationship according to the model identifier of the target terminal, and the first correspondence relationship is used to instruct the access control device to recognize The roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier of.
  37. 如权利要求35或36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the device further comprises:
    第一获取模块,用于获取所述目标终端的媒体接入控制MAC地址;The first obtaining module is configured to obtain the media access control MAC address of the target terminal;
    第三确定模块,用于根据所述目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定 所述目标终端的款型标识,所述第二对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;The third determining module is configured to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the access control device The model identification corresponding to each identified MAC address;
    第二发送模块,用于向所述第一接入点设备发送所述目标终端的款型标识,以使所述第一接入点设备根据所述目标终端的款型标识确定所述参考漫游引导条件。The second sending module is configured to send the model identifier of the target terminal to the first access point device, so that the first access point device determines the reference roaming according to the model identifier of the target terminal Guidance conditions.
  38. 如权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一获取模块包括:The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the first obtaining module comprises:
    接收子模块,用于接收所述第一接入点设备发送的款型查询请求,所述款型查询请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;或者A receiving submodule, configured to receive a model query request sent by the first access point device, where the model query request carries the MAC address of the target terminal; or
    获取子模块,用于从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中获取所述目标终端的MAC地址。The obtaining submodule is used to obtain the MAC address of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal.
  39. 如权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 34, wherein the device further comprises:
    第二接收模块,用于接收所述第一接入点设备发送的第二引导条件获取请求,所述第二引导条件获取请求携带所述目标终端的MAC地址;A second receiving module, configured to receive a second guide condition acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the second guide condition acquisition request carries the MAC address of the target terminal;
    第四确定模块,用于根据所述目标终端的MAC地址,从存储的第二对应关系中,确定所述目标终端的款型标识,所述第二对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个MAC地址对应的款型标识;根据所述目标终端的款型标识,从存储的第一对应关系中,确定所述参考漫游引导条件,所述第一对应关系用于指示所述接入控制设备识别出的各个款型标识对应的漫游引导条件。The fourth determining module is configured to determine the model identifier of the target terminal from the stored second correspondence relationship according to the MAC address of the target terminal, and the second correspondence relationship is used to indicate the access control device The identified model identifier corresponding to each MAC address; according to the model identifier of the target terminal, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined from the stored first corresponding relationship, and the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate the The roaming guidance conditions corresponding to each model identifier recognized by the access control device.
  40. 如权利要求37或39所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 37 or 39, wherein the device further comprises:
    第二获取模块,用于从所述目标终端发送的数据报文中,获取所述目标终端的MAC地址和所述目标终端的款型描述信息;The second acquiring module is configured to acquire the MAC address of the target terminal and the model description information of the target terminal from the data message sent by the target terminal;
    第五确定模块,用于根据所述目标终端的款型描述信息,确定所述目标终端的款型标识;A fifth determining module, configured to determine the model identifier of the target terminal according to the model description information of the target terminal;
    第一存储模块,用于将所述目标终端的MAC地址和所述目标终端的款型标识,存储至所述第二对应关系中。The first storage module is configured to store the MAC address of the target terminal and the model identifier of the target terminal into the second correspondence.
  41. 如权利要求34-40任一项权利要求所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device according to any one of claims 34-40, wherein the device further comprises:
    第三接收模块,用于接收所述第一接入点设备发送的列表获取请求,所述列表获取请求携带所述第一接入点设备的标识;A third receiving module, configured to receive a list acquisition request sent by the first access point device, where the list acquisition request carries an identifier of the first access point device;
    第六确定模块,用于根据所述第一接入点设备的标识,确定所述第一接入点设备对应的漫游设备列表,所述漫游设备列表包括一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识,所述一个或多个第三接入点设备为所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备;The sixth determining module is configured to determine a roaming device list corresponding to the first access point device according to the identifier of the first access point device, where the roaming device list includes one or more third access point devices The one or more third access point devices are neighbor access point devices of the first access point device;
    第三发送模块,用于向所述第一接入点设备发送所述漫游设备列表。The third sending module is configured to send the roaming device list to the first access point device.
  42. 如权利要求41所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device of claim 41, wherein the device further comprises:
    第三获取模块,用于获取多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,每条历史漫游记录包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,所述多条历史漫游记录中的源接入点设备均为所述第一接入点设备,所述漫游体验指示信息用于指示与所述第一接入点设备关联的终端漫游至相应历史漫游记录对应的目的接入点设备后的信号质 量是否改善;The third acquisition module is used to acquire multiple historical roaming records and roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record. Each historical roaming record includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the multiple historical roaming records are all the first access point devices, and the roaming experience indication information is used to instruct the terminal associated with the first access point device to roam to the corresponding historical roaming Record whether the signal quality of the corresponding destination access point device is improved;
    第七确定模块,用于根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识;The seventh determining module is configured to determine the identity of the one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record;
    第二存储模块,用于按照所述第一接入点设备的标识,存储所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The second storage module is configured to store the identification of the one or more third access point devices according to the identification of the first access point device.
  43. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第七确定模块包括:The device of claim 42, wherein the seventh determining module comprises:
    确定子模块,用于根据所述多条历史漫游记录,以及每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,按照强化学习的方式,确定所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The determining sub-module is configured to determine the identity of the one or more third access point devices according to the multiple historical roaming records and the roaming experience indication information corresponding to each historical roaming record in a manner of reinforcement learning.
  44. 如权利要求43所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定子模块用于:The device of claim 43, wherein the determining sub-module is configured to:
    按照每条历史漫游记录对应的漫游体验指示信息,从所述多条历史漫游记录中,选择漫游后的信号质量改善的历史漫游记录;According to the roaming experience instruction information corresponding to each historical roaming record, select a historical roaming record with improved signal quality after roaming from the multiple historical roaming records;
    获取所述第一接入点设备的邻居接入点设备的标识,且所述邻居接入点设备未包含在所述多条历史漫游记录中;Acquiring the identifier of the neighbor access point device of the first access point device, and the neighbor access point device is not included in the multiple historical roaming records;
    将选择的历史漫游记录中包括的目的接入点设备的标识以及获取的邻居接入点设备的标识,确定为所述一个或多个第三接入点设备的标识。The identification of the destination access point device and the acquired identification of the neighboring access point device included in the selected historical roaming record are determined as the identification of the one or more third access point devices.
  45. 如权利要求34-44任一项权利要求所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一确定模块用于:The device according to any one of claims 34-44, wherein the first determining module is configured to:
    确定多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,每个接入点设备组合包括源接入点设备的标识和目的接入点设备的标识,所述多个接入点设备组合中的源接入点设备均为所述第一接入点设备;Determine multiple access point device combinations and multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, and each access point device combination includes the identity of the source access point device and the identity of the destination access point device. The source access point devices in the multiple access point device combinations are all the first access point devices;
    按照所述多个接入点设备组合,以及每个接入点设备组合对应的多个参数组合,采用不同的引导测试条件对属于所述参考款型的一个或多个终端进行多次漫游引导测试,以成功引导属于所述参考款型的一个或多个终端漫游为标准,来确定所述参考漫游引导条件。According to the multiple access point device combinations and the multiple parameter combinations corresponding to each access point device combination, different guidance test conditions are used to conduct multiple roaming guidance for one or more terminals belonging to the reference model type In a test, the reference roaming guidance condition is determined based on the successful guidance of one or more terminals belonging to the reference model to roam.
  46. 如权利要求45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述多个参数组合是对一个或多个维度特征取不同值后组合得到的,所述一个或多个维度特征包括信号强度、信道、频段、负载中的一个或多个。The device of claim 45, wherein the multiple parameter combinations are obtained by combining one or more dimensional features with different values, and the one or more dimensional features include signal strength, channel, and frequency band. , One or more of the loads.
  47. 一种接入点设备,其特征在于,所述接入点设备包括:处理器和存储器;An access point device, characterized in that the access point device includes: a processor and a memory;
    所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令;The memory is used to store a computer program, and the computer program includes program instructions;
    所述处理器,用于调用所述计算机程序,实现如权利要求1-10任一项权利要求所述的漫游引导方法。The processor is configured to call the computer program to implement the roaming guidance method according to any one of claims 1-10.
  48. 一种接入控制设备,其特征在于,所述接入控制设备包括:处理器和存储器;An access control device, characterized in that the access control device includes: a processor and a memory;
    所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令;The memory is used to store a computer program, and the computer program includes program instructions;
    所述处理器,用于调用所述计算机程序,实现如权利要求11-23任一项权利要求所述的 漫游引导方法。The processor is configured to invoke the computer program to implement the roaming guidance method according to any one of claims 11-23.
  49. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质内存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现权利要求1-10任一项权利要求所述的方法的步骤。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-10 are realized.
  50. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质内存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现权利要求11-23任一项权利要求所述的方法的步骤。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 11-23 are realized.
  51. 一种漫游引导系统,其特征在于,所述漫游引导系统包括:多个接入点设备、接入控制设备和目标终端,所述多个接入点设备包括第一接入点设备,所述第一接入点设备用于实现权利要求1-10任一项权利要求所述的方法的步骤,所述接入控制设备用于实现权利要求11-23任一项权利要求所述的方法的步骤。A roaming guidance system, characterized in that the roaming guidance system includes: a plurality of access point devices, an access control device, and a target terminal; the multiple access point devices include a first access point device; The first access point device is used to implement the steps of the method described in any one of claims 1-10, and the access control device is used to implement the steps of the method described in any one of claims 11-23. step.
PCT/CN2020/142262 2020-03-27 2020-12-31 Roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, storage medium, and system WO2021190069A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BR112022019389A BR112022019389A2 (en) 2020-03-27 2020-12-31 METHOD, DEVICE, DEVICE, STORAGE MEDIA AND ROAMING DIRECTION SYSTEM
JP2022558280A JP2023518526A (en) 2020-03-27 2020-12-31 Roaming steering method, apparatus, device, storage medium, and system
EP20927152.7A EP4114090A4 (en) 2020-03-27 2020-12-31 Roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, storage medium, and system
US17/947,562 US20230014083A1 (en) 2020-03-27 2022-09-19 Roaming steering method, apparatus, device, storage medium, and system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010229128.0A CN113453312B (en) 2020-03-27 2020-03-27 Roaming guiding method, device, equipment, storage medium and system
CN202010229128.0 2020-03-27

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/947,562 Continuation US20230014083A1 (en) 2020-03-27 2022-09-19 Roaming steering method, apparatus, device, storage medium, and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021190069A1 true WO2021190069A1 (en) 2021-09-30

Family

ID=77808063

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/142262 WO2021190069A1 (en) 2020-03-27 2020-12-31 Roaming guidance method, apparatus and device, storage medium, and system

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US20230014083A1 (en)
EP (1) EP4114090A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2023518526A (en)
CN (2) CN113453312B (en)
BR (1) BR112022019389A2 (en)
WO (1) WO2021190069A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114554475A (en) * 2022-02-25 2022-05-27 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Roaming method and device, and storage medium
CN115175166B (en) * 2022-07-25 2023-09-15 东集技术股份有限公司 Wireless roaming access point determining method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070265021A1 (en) * 2006-05-11 2007-11-15 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Roaming control device, mobile communication terminal, mobile communication system, and roaming control method
CN102833824A (en) * 2012-08-30 2012-12-19 福建星网锐捷网络有限公司 Access method and device for wireless local area network and network equipment
CN103067975A (en) * 2013-01-14 2013-04-24 福建星网锐捷网络有限公司 Method and device of load balancing in wireless local area network
CN105027620A (en) * 2013-12-27 2015-11-04 华为技术有限公司 Method for switchover, user equipment, base station, and access point
CN106954225A (en) * 2017-05-25 2017-07-14 普联技术有限公司 Method, device and the wireless device of radio roaming
CN107889145A (en) * 2016-09-29 2018-04-06 华为技术有限公司 Switching method and device
CN110868740A (en) * 2019-11-12 2020-03-06 普联技术有限公司 Roaming switching control method and device and electronic equipment

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN100592790C (en) * 2005-03-07 2010-02-24 艾利森电话股份有限公司 Multimedia channel switching
CN102075980B (en) * 2009-11-25 2015-02-04 中国移动通信集团福建有限公司 Method and device for obtaining system switching information element
CN103686890B (en) * 2012-09-07 2016-12-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The method and system of wireless local network wireless terminal roaming switching
CN103945361B (en) * 2014-04-22 2018-05-22 福建星网锐捷网络有限公司 Processing method, system and the wireless access point that website roams in WLAN
CN107580360A (en) * 2016-07-04 2018-01-12 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 A kind of network is cut into slices method, equipment and the network architecture of selection
CN108235384B (en) * 2016-12-12 2020-10-16 华为技术有限公司 Wireless network switching method and device
CN108811005A (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-13 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 A kind of switching method and device of communication network
US10939356B2 (en) * 2017-09-30 2021-03-02 Arris Enterprises Llc Access-point discovery of wireless-network topology
CN110708734B (en) * 2019-10-12 2022-09-27 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Switching method, network equipment, terminal and switching system

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070265021A1 (en) * 2006-05-11 2007-11-15 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Roaming control device, mobile communication terminal, mobile communication system, and roaming control method
CN102833824A (en) * 2012-08-30 2012-12-19 福建星网锐捷网络有限公司 Access method and device for wireless local area network and network equipment
CN103067975A (en) * 2013-01-14 2013-04-24 福建星网锐捷网络有限公司 Method and device of load balancing in wireless local area network
CN105027620A (en) * 2013-12-27 2015-11-04 华为技术有限公司 Method for switchover, user equipment, base station, and access point
CN107889145A (en) * 2016-09-29 2018-04-06 华为技术有限公司 Switching method and device
CN106954225A (en) * 2017-05-25 2017-07-14 普联技术有限公司 Method, device and the wireless device of radio roaming
CN110868740A (en) * 2019-11-12 2020-03-06 普联技术有限公司 Roaming switching control method and device and electronic equipment

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BROADCOM CORPORATION: "Some Considerations for developing RAN rules for WLAN/3GPP Radio Interworking", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #85-BIS R2-141214, 4 April 2014 (2014-04-04), XP050817777 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116782317A (en) 2023-09-19
CN113453312A (en) 2021-09-28
BR112022019389A2 (en) 2022-11-16
EP4114090A4 (en) 2023-08-09
JP2023518526A (en) 2023-05-01
CN113453312B (en) 2023-02-10
US20230014083A1 (en) 2023-01-19
EP4114090A1 (en) 2023-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11432366B2 (en) Session management method, device, and system
US11445569B2 (en) Session establishment method and system, and device
EP3709707B1 (en) Slice information update method and apparatus
US12004264B2 (en) Session management method, device, and system
US20220400421A1 (en) Cell reselection method and apparatus, and communication device
US11457489B2 (en) Terminal interaction with different user plane function entities
US10356845B2 (en) Mobile station, repeater, trunking communication system and method therefor
US20230014083A1 (en) Roaming steering method, apparatus, device, storage medium, and system
US20230180112A1 (en) Access control method and apparatus, and communication device
US11533643B2 (en) Quality of service monitoring method and system, and device
CN111586793B (en) Communication method, device and computer readable storage medium
US20220264378A1 (en) Communication Method, Device, and System
US20230180106A1 (en) Communication Method and System in Wireless Local Area Network, and Apparatus
CN104955128B (en) Load information transmission method and system, and network element
WO2020192387A1 (en) Request processing method, related apparatus and system
EP2871910A1 (en) Communication method and system, access network device, terminal, and core network device
US20210176698A1 (en) Method for updating system information, terminal, and network side device
WO2020164470A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
EP3952462A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus, and terminal device
CN111918302B (en) Method and apparatus for network slice update
CN114071646A (en) Access control method, device, terminal and network equipment
JP7499878B2 (en) Method and apparatus for determining a terminal profile, device, storage medium, and system - Patents.com
EP4277369A1 (en) Short-distance communication method and apparatus
RU2772710C2 (en) Method for processing request and corresponding object
US20240155650A1 (en) Resource selection method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20927152

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022558280

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112022019389

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020927152

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220926

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112022019389

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20220926